WO2022151444A1 - 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 - Google Patents
一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022151444A1 WO2022151444A1 PCT/CN2021/072329 CN2021072329W WO2022151444A1 WO 2022151444 A1 WO2022151444 A1 WO 2022151444A1 CN 2021072329 W CN2021072329 W CN 2021072329W WO 2022151444 A1 WO2022151444 A1 WO 2022151444A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- time
- time unit
- dmrs
- information
- unit
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 193
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 288
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 claims description 260
- 230000006854 communication Effects 0.000 claims description 160
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 155
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 93
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 45
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 41
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 26
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 22
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 17
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005562 fading Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000019800 disodium phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003252 repetitive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012141 concentrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
- H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
- H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
- H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
- H04L25/0224—Channel estimation using sounding signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
- H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
- H04L27/2602—Signal structure
- H04L27/261—Details of reference signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0078—Timing of allocation
- H04L5/0087—Timing of allocation when data requirements change
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
- H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/22—Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
- H04W8/24—Transfer of terminal data
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and in particular, to a DMRS configuration method and device.
- a demodulation reference signal is defined in the current radio access technology New Radio Access Technology (NR) protocol for channel estimation.
- the network side configures the terminal with different DMRS to ensure communication performance.
- PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
- PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
- the receiving end can demodulate the data transmitted on the PUSCH or PDSCH based on the channel state information estimated by the DMRS.
- the network device can configure more DMRS to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the network device can configure less DMRS, thereby reducing the time-frequency resource overhead of the DMRS.
- the determination of the number of DMRS is based on the radio resource control signaling (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling configuration, and the update of RRC signaling is slow, before the update
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- the same DMRS configuration information is used to determine the number of DMRSs sent for multiple transmissions within a certain period of time, and the number of DMRS configurations cannot be dynamically adjusted by flexibly matching the channel fading changes of different transmissions, resulting in poor channel estimation capability.
- the present application provides a DMRS configuration method and device, so as to realize flexible adaptation of DMRS quantity and channel quality.
- a first aspect provides a DMRS configuration method, the method comprising: a terminal device receiving first scheduling information sent by a network device, where the first scheduling information is used by the terminal device to determine transmission on a first time unit Whether the first condition is met;
- the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information of the second time unit The information is different, and the transmission on the first time unit does not meet the first condition;
- the second time unit is a time unit before the first time unit, the first time unit and the second time unit are in the same transmission direction, and the second time unit and the first time unit are in the same transmission direction. There is no transmission in the opposite direction between a time unit, and the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, and the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- the terminal device sends uplink data in the first time unit and the second time unit; or, the terminal device receives downlink data in the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the technical solution is implemented by the terminal equipment, by restricting the transmission on multiple time units, so that the multiple time units meet the requirements of joint channel estimation, and the transmission on the first time unit can maintain the phase continuity with the transmission on the second time unit.
- the DMRS satisfying the phase continuity on the first time unit and the second time unit can be combined only when the data is received, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the demodulation performance of the transmitted data.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the scheduling information that plays the function is directly carried in the DCI corresponding to each time unit scheduled by the base station. Redundant fields or newly added fields of DCI can be reused, which not only reduces delay, but also has high compatibility.
- the terminal device receives third scheduling information sent by the network device, where the third scheduling information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a first duration of time
- the second condition includes one or more of the following:
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- a sending device can be understood as a device that sends data, that is, any one of a network device or a terminal device, and the first duration can be understood as a period of time, the interval between the first time unit and the second time unit There are time domain symbols or periodic time periods in which no data is transmitted.
- the third scheduling information can be used to restrict that when the terminal device sends uplink data or when the network device sends downlink data, the second condition must be satisfied within the first duration, that is, the terminal device or the network device does not turn off the power amplifier, The carrier frequency is switched or the antenna is switched, and the time unit that satisfies the second condition can be used for joint channel estimation.
- the transmission of uplink data or downlink data is further restricted, the possibility of joint channel estimation is improved, and the accuracy of channel estimation is further improved.
- the third scheduling information in this technical solution may be different scheduling information from the first scheduling information, or may be the same scheduling information as the first scheduling information, that is, if the first scheduling information indicates that the first time unit satisfies the first condition, then by default, for the case where the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, the second condition also needs to be satisfied at the same time.
- the second condition is valid for the first duration, and the first duration is configured by the network device through RRC signaling ; or, the first duration is predefined.
- the transmission of downlink data or uplink data can be restricted within the first duration, and if the time exceeds the first restriction time, the data transmission of the network device or the terminal device is not restricted by the second condition.
- the network device may configure a first duration through RRC signaling, and the value of the first duration may be several time slots, several milliseconds, or several time domain symbols, etc.
- the value is used to determine the effective limit time of the second condition; or, the first duration is predefined, in this case, the network device does not need to configure and send the third scheduling information independently, which reduces the signaling overhead of the network device.
- the method before the terminal device receives downlink data, the method further includes: the terminal device reports capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used for Indicates whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the capability information may be 1-bit indication information, 1 parameter or multiple-bit indication information configured by the network device.
- the capability information is 1-bit indication information, where the value of 1-bit informs the network device whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units, for example, when 1 is taken, it is satisfied, and when 0 is taken, it is not satisfied;
- the capability information is one parameter configured by the terminal device, and the one parameter includes multiple bits. Different values of this parameter are used to indicate the maximum number of different time units that the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation.
- the value of the one parameter can directly indicate the number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device, that is, the value of the one parameter is the same as the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device.
- the value of the capability information is 6, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the value of the one parameter may also correspond to the number of one time unit according to a predefined relationship. For example, the predefined relationship is that the value of the 1 parameter is half of the number of time units that the terminal device supports joint channel estimation at most.
- the value of the capability information is 3, indicating that the terminal device can support more Joint channel estimation for 6 time units.
- the capability information includes multiple bits of indication information, and the multiple bits include a first bit portion and a second bit portion.
- the value of the first bit indicates whether the network device terminal device supports joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the value of the second bit part indicates how many time units the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation at most.
- the number of time units included in the first time unit and the second time unit may be the same or different.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a second aspect provides a DMRS configuration method, wherein the method includes: a terminal device receiving first indication information sent by a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a third time unit and a fourth time unit The number of time units in the time unit interval, the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the fourth time unit is the same number of demodulation reference signal DMRS configurations as the third time unit in the multiple time units and A time unit with the closest interval, wherein at least one fifth time unit is included between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, and the number of DMRS configurations on the fifth time unit is smaller than the third time unit The number of DMRS configurations on the terminal device; according to the first indication information, the terminal device determines the number of DMRS configurations on the multiple time units.
- the technical solution is executed by a terminal device, and the interval between time units in which more DMRSs can be configured is determined by the first indication information, and fewer DMRSs are configured on the middle time units, which can reduce the total overhead of DMRS in multiple time units. , which helps to improve the spectral efficiency of the system.
- the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal device, second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the multiple The number of time units of the K time units is K, and K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; wherein, the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data block;
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units; or, the K time units include multiple A data block, the plurality of data blocks are partly the same and partly different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the number of time units for jointly configuring the number of DMRSs can be determined by the value of the second indication information; when multiple time units When the same data block is transmitted, the second indication information is used to indicate whether to enable the function of joint channel estimation of K time units, and the number of repeated transmissions is configured by RRC signaling.
- the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information is greater than that determined by the second indication information
- the number of multiple time units in the K is reduced by 2, and the K time units adopt the DMRS configuration of "first dense and later sparse".
- the third time unit is the first time unit among the K time units determined by the second indication information, and the fourth time unit is not among the K time units.
- the third time unit is configured with more time units, and the remaining time units are configured with a smaller number of DMRSs.
- the number of upper DMRSs on the intermediate time unit is less than the number of DMRSs configured on the third time unit.
- the technical side can perform fast and accurate channel estimation by using a plurality of DMRS concentrated on one time unit, which not only reduces the time delay but also improves the efficiency of demodulating data.
- the method before the terminal device receives the data on the multiple time units, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the first Capability information, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the indication of the first capability information may be 1-bit indication information, 1 parameter or multiple-bit indication information configured by the network device.
- the capability information is 1-bit indication information, in which the value of 1 bit informs the network device whether the terminal device can support the joint channel estimation of K time units, for example, when 1 is taken, it is satisfied; when 0 is taken, it is not satisfied;
- the capability information is one parameter configured by the terminal device, and the one parameter includes multiple bits. Different values of this parameter are used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most.
- the value of the one parameter can directly indicate the number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device, that is, the value of the one parameter is the same as the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device.
- the value of the capability information is 6, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the value of the one parameter may also correspond to the number of one time unit according to a predefined relationship. For example, the predefined relationship is that the value of the 1 parameter is half of the number of time units that the terminal device supports joint channel estimation at most.
- the value of the capability information is 3, indicating that the terminal device can support more Joint channel estimation for 6 time units.
- the capability information includes multiple bits of indication information, and the multiple bits include a first bit portion and a second bit portion.
- the value of the first bit indicates whether the network device terminal device can support joint channel estimation for K time units.
- the value of the second bit portion indicates that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most.
- the present technical solution informs the network whether the terminal device can perform joint channel estimation for K time units by means of the terminal device actively reporting the first capability information, thereby improving the efficiency of data transmission.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the terminal device when the value of K indicated by the network device is less than the value M of the maximum time units that the terminal device can support, the terminal device can only receive the DMRS sent on the K time units, and perform joint channel estimation on the K time units. .
- the terminal device does not expect that the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated in the indication information delivered by the network device is smaller than the number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support.
- the terminal device performs the relevant operations of joint channel estimation by "truncating processing” or “sliding processing” ”, the specific operation method can refer to the description below, and will not be repeated here.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the starting time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a data block transmission occupied by one time time domain resources.
- a third aspect provides a DMRS configuration method, the method includes: a terminal device receives first downlink control information DCI sent by a network device, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first A DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern set includes at least two different DMRS configuration patterns; according to the first DMRS configuration pattern, the terminal device determines the number of DMRS configurations in K time units , the number of DMRSs configured on at least two of the K time units is different, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the technical solution is performed by a terminal device, and the terminal device determines a first DMRS configuration pattern from a set of sets including multiple different DMRS configuration patterns through the first DCI, and the DMRS configuration pattern in at least two time units in the DMRS configuration pattern
- Different numbers not only realize dynamic and flexible scheduling of DMRS configuration patterns, reduce time delay, but also improve the adaptability of channel quality and DMRS number.
- the K is predefined, or the K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information, or the first DMRS configuration pattern The number of value contents in is determined.
- the value of K is flexible and diverse. If it is predefined, a certain signaling overhead can be reduced; it can also be determined by additional indication information for the network device.
- the additional indication information is used to determine the repetition of the data block.
- the number of transmissions or when multiple time units transmit different transmission blocks the indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks. It can be understood that the data blocks transmitted in multiple time units are different from each other, and it can also be understood that the data blocks transmitted in multiple time units are partially the same, and the rest are different; it can also be through the corresponding data in the first DMRS pattern. dmrs-AdditionalPosition number to determine.
- the maximum number of additional DMRSs that can be configured in 1-4 time units is 2, 0, 2, and 0, respectively.
- maxLength in the additional DMRS configuration pattern set, can only have one value, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit is the same
- maxLength can have two values, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit in each configuration scheme is different.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the DMRS configuration pattern set is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate an index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the terminal device receives the first data sent by the network device.
- the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal device, MAC CE signaling of a medium access control layer control unit sent by the network device, where the MAC CE signaling is used to activate the terminal device according to the first
- the index value of the DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern is determined from the set of DMRS configuration patterns.
- the terminal device if the network device does not send the trigger signaling MAC CE signaling to the terminal device, that is, there is no MAC CE signaling to deactivate the terminal device to determine the first DMRS pattern according to the first DCI, the terminal device is still configured according to the RRC signaling
- the values of parameters such as dmrs-additional Position and max Length are used to configure the DMRS of each time unit, and perform uplink transmission or downlink reception.
- the first DMRS pattern is determined by the index value of the first DCI, which reduces the time delay, realizes the dynamic and flexible scheduling of the DMRS configuration pattern, reduces the time delay, and also improves the adaptation of the channel quality and the number of DMRSs. sex.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set may also include an additional DMRS quantity configuration set, a change amount configuration set in the number of additional DMRSs, a total DMRS quantity configuration set, and a total DMRS configuration set. Any of the delta configuration sets for the quantity.
- a method for configuring a DMRS comprising: a terminal device receiving first information sent by a network device, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmission power is used in K time units or the same transmission power is used in K time units. Perform joint channel estimation on K time units; according to the first information, the terminal device determines that at most one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured on each time unit in the K time units, where K is A positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- This technical solution is executed by the terminal equipment, and it is determined by the first information that K are the joint channel estimation using the same transmit power in time units or K time units, and each time unit in the K inter-units is configured with at most 1 channel
- the additional demodulation reference signal DMRS can achieve more accurate channel estimation, improve the demodulation performance of the transmitted data, and reduce the total overhead of the DMRS.
- K is greater than the first threshold value
- the first threshold value is predefined; or, the first threshold value is indicated by the network device through second information; wherein, the second information and the first information are carried in the same message. or, the second information and the first information are carried in different signaling.
- the network device is further configured with a first threshold value.
- K time units perform joint channel estimation
- K is greater than or equal to the first threshold value
- each time unit in the K time units The number of additional DMRSs can be configured at most 1, that is, the candidate values of additional DMRSs can only be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . Because during joint channel estimation, there are already more DMRSs available than the number of DMRSs in a single time unit, and there is no need to configure 2 or 3 additional DMRSs per time unit, which reduces the DMRS overhead.
- the first information is carried in downlink control information DCI or radio resource control RRC signaling.
- possible values of the first threshold value may be 2, 4, 8, etc., and the first threshold value is greater than or equal to 2.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a fifth aspect provides a method for configuring a DMRS, wherein the method includes:
- the terminal device receives third indication information sent by the network device, where the third indication information includes N values, the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value among the N values The value is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signals DMRS on the i-th time unit in the N time units, where i and N are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N; according to the third indication information, the terminal device determines the number of DMRSs on each of the N time units.
- the technical solution is executed by the terminal device, and the DMRS quantity information of K time units is configured through the third indication information, so that joint and flexible DMRS quantity configuration on K time units is realized.
- the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits; or, the time-domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS The number is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the time domain symbol positions occupied by the DMRS in one time unit are at most 4, so when the preposition occupies one time domain symbol, the additional DMRS also occupies one time domain symbol, that is, a maximum of 4 time domain symbols can be configured on a time unit DMRS, its quantity information can be determined by the value of 2 bits; when the preposition occupies two time domain symbols, the additional DMRS also occupies two time domain symbols, that is, a maximum of 2 DMRS can be configured on a time unit, through 1 bit of DMRS. The value can determine its quantity information.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the third indication information when the third indication information is carried in the RRC signaling, the third indication information includes N values, namely ⁇ Pos s1, Pos s2, Pos s3, ..., Pos sN ⁇ , each value corresponds to At the position of the additional DMRS on each time unit in the N time units, the value of Pos si corresponds to the quantity information of the additional DMRS on the ith time unit in the N time units.
- the network device or the terminal device can flexibly configure the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information. In joint channel estimation, sufficient channel estimation accuracy can be guaranteed on the one hand, and lower DMRS overhead can be guaranteed on the other hand, which helps to improve transmission efficiency and performance.
- the third indication information When the third indication information is carried in the DCI, the third indication information includes N groups of bits, the N groups of bits are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the ith value in the N values corresponds to the ith value in the N groups of bits.
- the i-th group of bits that is, the i-th value is determined by the i-th group of bits.
- the network device or the terminal device can indicate the configuration of the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information carried on the DCI, which realizes the dynamic adjustment of the number of DMRS configurations and reduces the delay.
- the information on the quantity of DMRSs includes any one of the following types of information: the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs, the variation in the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs , where the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the number of additional DMRSs and the number of preamble DMRSs.
- the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the type of the quantity information of the DMRS is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including the value of the configuration information or the index value of the value to be determined.
- the type of the quantity information of the DMRS is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the default i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit; when the third indication
- the information is carried in the DCI, and the type of the DMRS quantity information is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including determining the type of the DMRS quantity information by using a value of the configuration information or an index value of the value.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the method further includes: the terminal device receiving Fourth indication information sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the i-th time unit is not configured with a pre-DMRS.
- the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit by default.
- the i-th value is used to indicate a change in the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, and the method further includes:
- the terminal device receives fifth indication information sent by the network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the i-th time unit is configured with a pre-DMRS.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI, and the method further includes:
- the terminal device determines the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit ;or,
- the terminal device determines the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit ;or,
- the terminal device determines the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit.
- the variation of the number of additional DMRSs, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time; or,
- the terminal device determines the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the ith value is used to indicate the DMRS on the ith time unit. Variation of the total number of DMRSs, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the additional number of DMRSs at the i-th time.
- the terminal device or the network device configures the number of additional DMRSs or the number of DMRSs in N time units according to the third indication information
- the total number that is, the DCI covers the value of the additional number of DMRSs configured by the original RRC signaling, and realizes the dynamic adjustment of the number of DMRSs in K time units.
- the terminal device or the network device When the third indication information is used to indicate the variation information of the number of additional DMRSs in N time units or the variation information of the total number of DMRSs in N time units, the terminal device or the network device, according to the third indication information, combines the original Algebraic calculation is performed on the value of the additional DMRS quantity configured in the RRC signaling to configure the additional DMRS quantity or the total DMRS quantity in N time units.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit
- the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or a positive integer equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a sixth aspect provides a method for configuring a DMRS, the method comprising:
- the network device determines first scheduling information, where the first scheduling information is used by the terminal device to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition;
- the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information of the second time unit The information is different, and the transmission on the first time unit does not meet the first condition;
- the second time unit is a time unit before the first time unit, the first time unit and the second time unit are in the same transmission direction, and the second time unit and the first time unit are in the same transmission direction. There is no transmission in the opposite direction between a time unit, and the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, and the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- the network device sends downlink data to the terminal device in the first time unit and the second time unit; or, the network device receives the downlink data in the first time unit and the second time unit Uplink data sent by the terminal device.
- the technical solution is implemented by the network device.
- the multiple time units meet the requirements of joint channel estimation, and the data sent on the first time unit can be kept the same as the data sent on the second time unit.
- the DMRS satisfying the phase continuity on the first time unit and the second time unit can be combined only when the data is received, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the demodulation performance of the transmitted data.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the scheduling information that plays the function is directly carried in the DCI corresponding to each time unit scheduled by the base station. Redundant fields or newly added fields of DCI can be reused, which not only reduces delay, but also has high compatibility.
- the method further includes:
- the network device sends third scheduling information to the terminal device, where the third scheduling information is used to indicate that the sending device satisfies a second condition within the first duration, and the second condition includes one or more of the following:
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the sending device refers to a device that sends data, that is, one of a network device or a terminal device.
- the first duration may be understood as a time period, a time domain symbol or a periodic time period in which no data is transmitted between the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the third scheduling information can be used to restrict that when the terminal device sends uplink data or when the network device sends downlink data, the second condition must be satisfied within the first duration, that is, the terminal device or the network device does not turn off the power amplifier, The carrier frequency is switched or the antenna is switched, and the time unit that satisfies the second condition can be used for joint channel estimation.
- the transmission of uplink data or downlink data is further restricted, the possibility of joint channel estimation is improved, and the accuracy of channel estimation is further improved.
- the third scheduling information in this technical solution may be different scheduling information from the first scheduling information; or may be the same scheduling information as the first scheduling information, that is, if the first scheduling information indicates that the first time unit satisfies the first condition, then by default, for the case where the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, the second condition also needs to be satisfied at the same time.
- the second condition is valid for the first duration, and the first duration is configured by the network device through RRC signaling ; or, the first duration is predefined.
- the transmission of downlink data or uplink data can be restricted within the first duration, and if the time exceeds the first restriction time, the data transmission of the network device or the terminal device is not restricted by the second condition.
- the network device may configure a first duration through RRC signaling, and the value of the first duration may be several time slots, several milliseconds, or several time domain symbols, etc.
- the value is used to determine the effective limit time of the second condition; or, the first duration is predefined, in this case, the network device does not need to configure and send the third scheduling information independently, which reduces the signaling overhead of the network device.
- the method before the network device sends the downlink data, the method further includes:
- the network device receives capability information sent by the terminal device, where the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the capability information may be a field, the field contains one or more bits, and different state values or different values of the field indicate different capability information:
- the capability information is 1-bit indication information, 1 parameter or multiple-bit indication information configured by the network device.
- the value of 1 bit is used to inform the network device whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units, for example, when 1 is taken, it is satisfied;
- the capability information is one parameter configured by the terminal device, and the one parameter includes multiple bits. Different values of this parameter are used to indicate the maximum number of different time units that the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation.
- the value of the one parameter can directly indicate the number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device, that is, the value of the one parameter is the same as the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device.
- the value of the capability information is 6, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the value of the one parameter may also correspond to the number of one time unit according to a predefined relationship. For example, the predefined relationship is that the value of the 1 parameter is half of the number of time units that the terminal device supports joint channel estimation at most.
- the value of the capability information is 3, indicating that the terminal device can support more Joint channel estimation for 6 time units.
- the capability information includes multiple bits of indication information, and the multiple bits include a first bit portion and a second bit portion.
- the value of the first bit indicates whether the network device terminal device supports joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the value of the second bit part indicates how many time units the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation at most.
- the number of time units included in the first time unit and the second time unit may be the same or different.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a seventh aspect provides a method for configuring a DMRS, the method comprising:
- the network device determines first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the fourth time unit It is a time unit that has the same number of DMRS configurations as the third time unit and has the closest interval among the multiple time units, wherein the third time unit and the fourth time unit include at least one time unit.
- a fifth time unit, the DMRS configuration quantity on the fifth time unit is less than the DMRS configuration quantity on the third time unit;
- the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
- the technical solution is performed by a network device, and the interval between time units in which more DMRSs can be configured is determined through the first indication information, and fewer DMRSs are configured on the middle time units, which can reduce the total overhead of DMRS in multiple time units , which helps to improve the spectral efficiency of the system.
- the method further includes:
- the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the number of time units of the multiple time units is K, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data block; or, each of the K time units
- the data blocks transmitted in the K time units are different from each other, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks in the K time units;
- the plurality of data blocks are partially identical and partially different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the number of time units for jointly configuring the number of DMRSs can be determined by the value of the second indication information;
- the second indication information is used to indicate whether to enable the function of joint channel estimation of K time units, and the number of repeated transmissions is configured by RRC signaling.
- the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information is greater than that determined by the second indication information
- the number of multiple time units in the K is reduced by 2, and the K time units adopt the DMRS configuration of "first dense and later sparse".
- the third time unit is the first time unit among the K time units determined by the second indication information, and the fourth time unit is not among the K time units.
- the third time unit is configured with more time units, and the remaining time units are configured with a smaller number of DMRSs.
- the number of upper DMRSs on the intermediate time unit is less than the number of DMRSs configured on the third time unit.
- the method before the network device sends the downlink data in the multiple time units, the method further includes: the network device receives the data sent by the terminal device.
- First capability information where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the capability information may be a field, the field contains one or more bits, and different state values or different values of the field indicate different capability information, and the specific indication includes the following possible ways:
- the capability information is 1-bit indication information, and the value of 1-bit informs the network device whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units and time units. For example, when the value of 1 bit is 1, the terminal device can satisfy the joint channel estimation of multiple time units; when the value of 1 bit is 0, the terminal device cannot support the joint channel estimation of multiple time units;
- the capability information is one parameter configured by the terminal device, and the one parameter includes multiple bits. Different values of this parameter are used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most.
- the value of the one parameter can directly indicate the number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device, that is, the value of the one parameter is the same as the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device.
- the value of the capability information is 6, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the value of the one parameter may also correspond to the number of one time unit according to a predefined relationship. For example, the predefined relationship is that the value of the 1 parameter is half of the number of time units that the terminal device supports joint channel estimation at most.
- the value of the capability information is 3, indicating that the terminal device can support more Joint channel estimation for 6 time units.
- the capability information includes multiple bits of indication information, and the multiple bits include a first bit portion and a second bit portion.
- the value of the first bit indicates whether the network device terminal device supports joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the value of the second bit part indicates how many time units the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation at most.
- the present technical solution informs the network whether the terminal device can perform joint channel estimation for K time units by means of the terminal device actively reporting the first capability information, thereby improving the efficiency of data transmission.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the terminal device when the value of K indicated by the network device is less than the value M of the maximum time units that the terminal device can support, the terminal device can only receive the DMRS sent on the K time units, and perform joint channel estimation on the K time units. .
- the terminal device does not expect that the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated in the indication information delivered by the network device is smaller than the number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support.
- the terminal device performs operations related to joint channel estimation, "truncation processing” or " Sliding processing", the specific operation method can be found in the description below, and will not be repeated here.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS is a time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a data block transmission occupied time domain resources.
- a method for configuring a DMRS comprising:
- the network device determines the first downlink control information DCI, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern set includes at least two different DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern is used to determine the number of DMRS configurations on K time units, where the number of DMRS configurations on at least two time units in the K time units is different, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; the network device sends the first DCI to the terminal device.
- the technical solution is performed by a terminal device, and the terminal device determines a first DMRS configuration pattern from a set of sets including multiple different DMRS configuration patterns through the first DCI, and the DMRS configuration pattern in at least two time units in the DMRS configuration pattern
- Different numbers not only realize dynamic and flexible scheduling of DMRS configuration patterns, reduce time delay, but also improve the adaptability of channel quality and DMRS number.
- the K is predefined, or the K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information, or the first DMRS configuration pattern The number of value contents in is determined.
- the value of K is flexible and diverse. If it is predefined, a certain signaling overhead can be reduced; it can also be determined by additional indication information for the network device. When the same transmission block is transmitted in multiple time units, the additional indication information is used to determine the repetition of the data block. The number of transmissions or when different transmission blocks are transmitted in multiple time units, the indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks; it may also be determined by the number of corresponding dmrs-AdditionalPositions in the first DMRS pattern.
- the maximum number of additional DMRSs that can be configured in 1-4 time units is 2, 0, 2, and 0, respectively.
- maxLength in the additional DMRS configuration pattern set, can only have one value, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit is the same.
- maxLength can have two values, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit in each configuration scheme is different.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the DMRS configuration pattern set is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate an index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the network device sends the first DCI to the terminal device before, the method further includes:
- the network device sends the medium access control layer control unit MAC CE signaling to the terminal device, and the MAC CE signaling is used to activate the terminal device to start from the terminal device according to the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the first DMRS configuration pattern is determined in the DMRS configuration pattern set.
- the terminal device if the network device does not send the trigger signaling MAC CE signaling to the terminal device, that is, there is no MAC CE signaling to deactivate the terminal device to determine the first DMRS pattern according to the first DCI, the terminal device is still configured according to the RRC signaling
- the values of parameters such as dmrs-additional Position and max Length are used to configure the DMRS of each time unit, and perform uplink transmission or downlink reception.
- the first DMRS pattern is determined by the index value of the first DCI, which reduces the time delay, realizes the dynamic and flexible scheduling of the DMRS configuration pattern, reduces the time delay, and also improves the adaptation of the channel quality and the number of DMRSs. sex.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set may further include an additional DMRS quantity configuration set, a change amount configuration set of the number of additional DMRSs, a total DMRS quantity configuration set, and a total DMRS configuration set. Any of the delta configuration sets for the quantity.
- a ninth aspect provides a method for configuring a DMRS, the method comprising:
- the network device determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmission power is used in K time units or joint channel estimation is performed in K time units, each time unit in the K time units A maximum of one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured above, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; the network device sends the first information to the terminal device.
- the additional demodulation reference signal DMRS can achieve more accurate channel estimation, improve the demodulation performance of the transmitted data, and reduce the total overhead of the DMRS.
- K is greater than the first threshold value
- the first threshold value is predefined; or, the first threshold value is indicated by the network device through second information; wherein, the second information and the first information are carried in the same message. or, the second information and the first information are carried in different signaling.
- the network device is further configured with a first threshold value.
- K time units perform joint channel estimation
- K is greater than or equal to the first threshold value
- each time unit in the K time units The number of additional DMRSs can be configured at most 1, that is, the candidate values of additional DMRSs can only be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . Because during joint channel estimation, there are already more DMRSs available than the number of DMRSs in a single time unit, and there is no need to configure 2 or 3 additional DMRSs per time unit, which reduces the DMRS overhead.
- the first information is carried in downlink control information DCI or radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the possible values of the first threshold value may be 2, 4, 8, etc., and the first threshold value is greater than or equal to 2.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the starting time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a tenth aspect provides a method for configuring a DMRS, the method comprising:
- the network device determines third indication information, where the third indication information includes N values, the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value among the N values is used for Indicates the number of demodulation reference signals DMRS on the i-th time unit in the N time units, where 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N, and i and N are natural numbers;
- the network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device.
- the technical solution is executed by the network device, and the DMRS quantity information of the K time units is configured through the third indication information, thereby realizing the joint and flexible configuration of the DMRS quantity of the K time units.
- the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits; or, the time-domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS The number is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the time domain symbol positions occupied by the DMRS in one time unit are at most 4, so when the preposition occupies one time domain symbol, the additional DMRS also occupies one time domain symbol, that is, a maximum of 4 time domain symbols can be configured on a time unit DMRS, its quantity information can be determined by the value of 2 bits; when the preposition occupies two time domain symbols, the additional DMRS also occupies two time domain symbols, that is, a maximum of 2 DMRS can be configured on a time unit, through 1 bit of DMRS. The value can determine its quantity information.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the third indication information when the third indication information is carried in the RRC signaling, the third indication information includes N values, namely ⁇ Pos s1, Pos s2, Pos s3, ..., Pos sN ⁇ , each value corresponds to At the position of the additional DMRS on each time unit in the N time units, the value of Pos si corresponds to the quantity information of the additional DMRS on the ith time unit in the N time units.
- the network device or the terminal device can flexibly configure the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information. In joint channel estimation, sufficient channel estimation accuracy can be guaranteed on the one hand, and lower DMRS overhead can be guaranteed on the other hand, which helps to improve transmission efficiency and performance.
- the third indication information When the third indication information is carried in the DCI, the third indication information includes N groups of bits, the N groups of bits are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the ith value in the N values corresponds to the ith value in the N groups of bits.
- the i-th group of bits that is, the i-th value is determined by the i-th group of bits.
- the network device or the terminal device can indicate the configuration of the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information carried on the DCI, which realizes the dynamic adjustment of the number of DMRS configurations and reduces the delay.
- the information on the quantity of DMRSs includes any one of the following information types: the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs, the variation in the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs , where the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the number of additional DMRSs and the number of preamble DMRSs.
- the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the type of the quantity information of the DMRS is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including the value of the configuration information or the index value of the value to be determined.
- the type of the quantity information of the DMRS is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the default i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit; when the third indication
- the information is carried in the DCI, and the type of the quantity information of DMRS is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including determining the type of the quantity information of DMRS by the value of the configuration information or the index value of the value.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, and the method further includes:
- the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the i-th time unit is not configured with a pre-DMRS.
- the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit by default.
- the i-th value is used to indicate a change in the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, and the method further includes:
- the network device sends fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether a pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI, and the method further includes:
- the network device indicates the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit by sending the third indication information, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit. quantity; or,
- the network device indicates the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit by sending the third indication information, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit. quantity; or,
- the network device indicates the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit by sending the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit.
- the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time; or,
- the network device indicates the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit by sending the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit.
- the terminal device or the network device configures the number of additional DMRSs or the number of DMRSs in N time units according to the third indication information
- the total number that is, the DCI covers the value of the additional number of DMRSs configured by the original RRC signaling, and realizes the dynamic adjustment of the number of DMRSs in K time units.
- the terminal device or the network device When the third indication information is used to indicate the variation information of the number of additional DMRSs in N time units or the variation information of the total number of DMRSs in N time units, the terminal device or the network device, according to the third indication information, combines the original Algebraic calculation is performed on the value of the additional DMRS quantity configured in the RRC signaling to configure the additional DMRS quantity or the total DMRS quantity in N time units.
- the initial time domain occupied by the pre-DMRS The symbol is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and A positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of the jth time unit.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission.
- a communication device comprising:
- a transceiver unit configured to receive first scheduling information sent by the network device, where the first scheduling information is used to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition
- a processing unit configured to determine whether the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, wherein the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, and the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit.
- the transmission on a time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information is different from the second scheduling information of the second time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit does not satisfy the first condition;
- the second time unit is a time unit before the first time unit, the first time unit and the second time unit are in the same transmission direction, and the second time unit and the first time unit are in the same transmission direction. There is no transmission in the opposite direction between a time unit, and the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- the transceiver unit is further configured to send uplink data on the first time unit and the second time unit; or receive downlink data on the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the second condition is valid for the first duration
- the first duration is controlled by the network device through a radio resource control RRC signal. configuration; alternatively, the first duration is predefined.
- the transceiver unit before the transceiver unit receives the downlink data, the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the number of time units included in the first time unit and the second time unit may be the same or different.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a twelfth aspect provides a communication apparatus, comprising: a transceiver unit configured to receive first indication information sent by a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a time interval between a third time unit and a fourth time unit
- a processing unit configured to determine, according to the first indication information, the configuration quantity of the DMRS on the multiple time units.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data blocks; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks on the K time units; or,
- the K time units include multiple data blocks, and the multiple data blocks are partially identical and partially different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information is greater than the number of time units indicated by the second indication
- the number of multiple time units determined by the information is reduced by 2, and the DMRS configuration of "previously dense and later sparse" is adopted on the K time units.
- the transceiver unit before the transceiver unit receives the data on the multiple time units, the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the network device Reporting first capability information to the network device, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the communication apparatus can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a primary data block Time domain resources occupied by transmission.
- a thirteenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- a transceiver unit configured to receive first downlink control information DCI sent by a network device, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern The set includes at least two different DMRS configuration patterns; the processing unit is configured to determine, according to the first DCI, the number of DMRS configurations on K time units, wherein the number of DMRS on at least two time units in the K time units is The number of DMRS configurations is different, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the K is predefined, or the K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information, or the first DMRS The number of value contents in the configuration pattern is determined.
- maxLength in the additional DMRS configuration pattern set, can only have one value, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit are the same; of course, for the additional DMRS configuration pattern set, maxLength can have two values, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS on each time unit in each configuration scheme is different.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the DMRS configuration pattern set is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate an index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the transceiver unit receives the Before the first DCI
- the transceiver unit is configured to: receive the medium access control layer control unit MAC CE signaling sent by the network device, where the MAC CE signaling is used to activate the communication device according to the first DMRS an index value of a configuration pattern, and the first DMRS configuration pattern is determined from the set of DMRS configuration patterns.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- the DMRS configuration pattern set may further include an additional DMRS quantity configuration set, a variation of the number of additional DMRSs Any of the total number of delta configuration sets.
- a fourteenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- a transceiver unit configured to receive first information sent by a network device, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmit power is used in K time units or to perform joint channel estimation in K time units; a processing unit, used for It is determined according to the first information that at most one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured on each of the K time units, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is greater than the first threshold value
- the first threshold value is predefined; or, the first threshold value is indicated by the network device through second information; wherein the second information and the first information are carried in the same file signaling; or, the second information and the first information are carried in different signaling.
- the first information is carried in downlink control information DCI or radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the possible values of the first threshold value may be 2, 4, 8, etc., and the first threshold value is greater than or equal to 2.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a fifteenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- a transceiver unit configured to receive third indication information sent by a network device, where the third indication information includes N values, the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and among the N values
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signals DMRS on the i-th time unit in the N time units, where 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N, i and N are natural numbers; the processing unit is used for The quantity information of the DMRS on each of the N time units is determined according to the third indication information.
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits;
- the number of domain symbols is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the information on the quantity of DMRSs includes any one of the following types of information: the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs, the variation in the number of additional DMRSs, the The amount of change in the total number, where the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the number of additional DMRSs and the number of preamble DMRSs.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to receive configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit is further configured to: Receive fourth indication information sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that no pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit also uses In: receiving fifth indication information sent by the network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the i-th time unit is configured with a pre-DMRS.
- the third indication information is carried in the downlink control information DCI
- the processing unit is configured to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit according to the third indication information, wherein the i-th value is used to indicate the additional DMRS on the i-th time unit amount; or,
- the processing unit is configured to determine the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the number of DMRSs on the ith time unit. total quantity; or,
- the processing unit is configured to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit according to the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit The amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs over time, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time; or,
- the processing unit is configured to determine the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit according to the third indication information and RRC signaling, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit The amount of change in the total number of DMRSs on the ith time, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission .
- a sixteenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- a processing unit configured to determine first scheduling information, where the first scheduling information is used by the terminal device to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition;
- the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information of the second time unit The information is different, and the transmission on the first time unit does not meet the first condition;
- the second time unit is a time unit before the first time unit, the first time unit and the second time unit are in the same transmission direction, and the second time unit and the first time unit are in the same transmission direction. There is no transmission in the opposite direction between a time unit, and the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the data on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, and the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- a transceiver unit configured to send the first scheduling information to the terminal device
- the transceiver unit is further configured to send downlink data to the terminal device on the first time unit and the second time unit; or receive the downlink data on the first time unit and the second time unit Uplink data sent by the terminal device.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the second condition is valid for the first duration
- the first duration is controlled by the network device through a radio resource control RRC signal. configuration; alternatively, the first duration is predefined.
- the transceiver unit before the transceiver unit sends downlink data, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive capability information sent by the terminal device, and the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the number of time units included in the first time unit and the second time unit may be the same or different.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a seventeenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- the processing unit is configured to determine first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, where the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the third time unit belongs to a plurality of time units.
- a four time unit is a time unit that has the same number of DMRS configurations as the third time unit and has the closest interval, wherein the difference between the third time unit and the fourth time unit The interval includes at least one fifth time unit, and the number of DMRS configurations on the fifth time unit is less than the number of DMRS configurations on the third time unit; a transceiver unit, configured to send the first indication information to the terminal device .
- the transceiver unit is further configured to:
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks on the K time units; or,
- the K time units include multiple data blocks, and the multiple data blocks are partially identical and partially different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information is greater than the second indication
- the number of multiple time units determined by the information is reduced by 2, and the DMRS configuration of "previously dense and later sparse" is adopted on the K time units.
- the transceiver unit before the transceiver unit sends downlink data on the multiple time units, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the data sent by the terminal device. First capability information, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of M time units at most, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a primary data block Time domain resources occupied by transmission.
- a communication device comprising:
- the processing unit is configured to determine first downlink control information DCI, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern set includes at least two different DMRS configuration patterns, the first DMRS configuration pattern is used to determine the number of DMRS configurations on K time units, wherein the number of DMRS configurations on at least two time units in the K time units is different, Wherein, K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; the transceiver unit is configured to send the first DCI to the terminal device.
- the K is predefined, or the K is indicated by additional indication information, or is indicated by the first DMRS configuration pattern The number of value contents is determined.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the DMRS configuration pattern set is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate an index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the transceiver unit is used to send the information to the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to: send a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE signaling to the terminal device, where the MAC CE signaling is used to activate the terminal device according to the first DCI
- the index value of the DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern is determined from the set of DMRS configuration patterns.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the starting time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a nineteenth aspect provides a communication device, comprising:
- the processing unit is configured to determine first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmission power is used on K time units or joint channel estimation is performed on K time units, and each of the K time units A maximum of one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured on each time unit, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; the transceiver unit is configured to send the first information to the terminal device.
- K is greater than a first threshold value; the first threshold value is predefined; or, the first threshold value is determined by the The communication device indicates through second information; wherein, the second information and the first information are carried in the same signaling; or, the second information and the first information are carried in different signaling.
- the first information is carried in downlink control information DCI or radio resource control RRC signaling.
- possible values of the first threshold value may be 2, 4, 8, etc., and the first threshold value is greater than or equal to 2.
- the start occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a communication device comprising:
- a processing unit configured to determine third indication information, where the third indication information includes N values, the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value in the N values is The value is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signals DMRS on the i-th time unit in the N time units, where 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N, and i and N are natural numbers; the transceiver unit is used to send to the terminal equipment the third indication information.
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits;
- the number of domain symbols is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the information on the quantity of DMRSs includes any one of the following types of information: the number of additional DMRSs, the total number of DMRSs, the variation in the number of additional DMRSs, the The amount of change in the total number, where the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the number of additional DMRSs and the number of preamble DMRSs.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit is further configured to: Send fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that no pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit also uses In: sending fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the i-th time unit is configured with a pre-DMRS.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI
- the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, where the i-th value is used to indicate the additional DMRS on the i-th time unit amount; or,
- the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the number of DMRSs on the ith time unit. total quantity; or,
- the third indication information and RRC signaling are used to instruct the terminal device to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit
- the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs over time, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time; or,
- the third indication information and RRC signaling are used to instruct the terminal device to determine the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit.
- the amount of change in the total number of DMRSs on the ith time, the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time.
- the start time occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time domain symbol centered on the jth time unit, and the jth time unit is any time unit except the first and last two time units in the K time units, where j is greater than or equal to 1 and a positive integer less than or equal to K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling or is predefined.
- the time unit is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission .
- a communication apparatus comprising a processor coupled to a memory for storing a computer program or instructions, the processor for executing the computer program or instructions in the memory
- the instruction causes the method described in the first aspect to the tenth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the tenth aspect to be performed.
- a twenty-second aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program or instruction is stored, and the computer program or instruction is used to implement the first aspect to the tenth aspect or the first aspect to the tenth aspect The method described in any one of the possible implementations of the aspect.
- a twenty-second aspect provides a chip system, comprising: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the first to tenth aspects or the first The method described in any one possible implementation manner of the aspect to the tenth aspect.
- a twenty-third aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which, when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect
- a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
- the method in any one of the possible implementations of the to twentieth aspect and the first to the twentieth aspect.
- a communication system including the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication process according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is another schematic diagram of a communication process according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a resource pattern of a DMRS according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is another schematic diagram of a communication process according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of a communication process according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of a communication process according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is another schematic block diagram of the communication apparatus according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- GSM global system for mobile communications
- CDMA code division multiple access
- WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
- general packet radio service general packet radio service
- GPRS general packet radio service
- LTE long term evolution
- LTE frequency division duplex frequency division duplex
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
- WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 suitable for the method for transmitting and receiving reference signals according to the embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system 100 may include a network device 110 and a terminal device 120 , and optionally, the communication system may further include a terminal device 130 .
- the network device 110 can be any device with a wireless transceiver function or a chip that can be provided in the device, and the device includes but is not limited to: a base station (for example, a base station NodeB, an evolved base station eNodeB, a fifth generation ( 5G) network equipment in communication systems (such as transmission point (TP), transmission reception point (TRP), base station, small base station equipment, etc.), network equipment in future communication systems, wireless fidelity ( Access nodes, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. in a Wireless-Fidelity (WiFi) system.
- a base station for example, a base station NodeB, an evolved base station eNodeB, a fifth generation ( 5G) network equipment in communication systems (such as transmission point (TP), transmission reception point (TRP), base station, small base station equipment, etc.), network equipment in future communication systems, wireless fidelity ( Access nodes, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. in a Wireless-Fidelity (
- Network device 110 may communicate with a plurality of end devices, such as end devices 120-130 shown in the figures.
- terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
- the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on.
- the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit application scenarios.
- the aforementioned terminal equipment and the chips that can be provided in the aforementioned terminal equipment are collectively referred to as terminal equipment.
- the communication system 100 may also be a public land mobile network (PLMN) network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, or other networks.
- PLMN public land mobile network
- D2D device-to-device
- M2M machine-to-machine
- FIG. 1 is a simplified schematic diagram for easy understanding only, and the communication system 100 may also include other network devices and terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
- the network device configures the number of additional DMRSs through radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- the current NR protocol is configured with different DMRS time-frequency resource patterns (DMRS Pattern), and the DMRS configured by the current NR protocol includes front-loaded DMRS (front-loaded DMRS) and additional DMRS (additional DMRS).
- DMRS Pattern DMRS time-frequency resource patterns
- the current NR protocol defines the values of the DMRS Pattern related fields in Table 1 according to the distribution of DMRS in the frequency domain and time domain, and informs the UE through RRC signaling.
- Table 1 shows the possible values of the three fields configured by RRC signaling.
- each field can only have one value when configuring field parameters in RRC signaling.
- dmrs-type is type2
- max Length is len2
- dmrs-Additional Position is pos3.
- the field dmrs-type determines the pattern of the pre-DMRS in the frequency domain:
- each physical resource block (PRB) in the frequency domain has two groups of code division multiplexing (CDM), and the 6 subcarriers of each group of CDM are covered by orthogonal coverage
- CDM code division multiplexing
- OCC orthogonal cover code
- each PRB in the frequency domain has three groups of CDMs, and the 4 subcarriers of each group of CDMs can support 2 layers through OCC. Therefore, a single time-domain symbol can support up to 6 layers in type2.
- the parameter max Length determines the number of symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS in the time domain:
- the pre-DMRS only occupies one time domain symbol
- the pre-DMRS can occupy one time-domain symbol or two symbols. Specifically, it occupies several time-domain symbols, which need to be separately indicated by downlink control information (DCI). Therefore, by using a time-domain orthogonal cover code (OCC) between two time-domain symbols, multiplexing of UEs can be supported twice.
- DCI downlink control information
- the field dmrs-Additional Position determines the maximum number of additional DMRSs that can be configured in a transmission time interval (TTI):
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by each additional DMRS is the same as the number of time domain symbols occupied by the preceding DMRS.
- each additional DMRS also occupies one time domain symbol; when the preceding DMRS occupies two consecutive time domain symbols, if additional DMRSs are configured, each additional DMRS occupies one time domain symbol.
- the additional DMRS also occupy two consecutive time domain symbols.
- the DCI indication is consistent with the RRC signaling, that is, the pre-DMRS only occupies one time-domain symbol, and the additional DMRS can be configured with up to three;
- the above parameters for configuring the number of additional DMRSs are determined by high-layer RRC signaling, but the parameter configuration update of RRC signaling needs to go through many processes such as connection management, radio bearer control and connection mobility, so the update delay is relatively large.
- the transmission of data on multiple time units adopts the same configuration of additional DMRSs, that is, the maximum allowable number of additional DMRSs on each time unit is the same.
- the unit performs DMRS configuration.
- the present application proposes a DMRS configuration method for the transmitter to perform joint transmission based on the DMRS configuration, and correspondingly for the receiver to perform joint channel estimation based on the DMRS configuration.
- the transmitting end can ensure that the DMRS on multiple time units maintain phase continuity, that is, when phase noise unknown to the receiving and transmitting ends is not introduced, the receiving end can use the DMRS on multiple time units to perform joint channel estimation to improve channel estimation. accuracy and correct rate of data demodulation.
- the network equipment can perform joint channel estimation on the received uplink signals on multiple time units; in the downlink signal reception, the terminal equipment is informed by the indication information to perform joint channel estimation on multiple time units, wherein the network equipment is in different time units.
- Sending is also subject to certain restrictions. The following describes in detail the technical solution of the indication method for joint channel estimation provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 2 .
- the network device sends first scheduling information to the terminal device, where the first scheduling information is used by the terminal device to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information is different from the second scheduling information of the second time unit, the first Transmission over a time unit is not subject to the first condition;
- the second time unit is the time unit before the first time unit, which can also be understood as the time domain sequence of the second time unit is before the first time unit.
- the first time unit and the second time unit may be continuous time units or discontinuous time units.
- the transmission direction on the first time unit and the second time unit is the same, and there is no transmission in the opposite direction between the second time unit and the first time unit.
- the transmission on the first time unit and the second time unit are both Uplink transmission, or both are downlink transmission.
- the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous.
- there is a time unit that does not transmit any data between the first time unit and the second time unit and there is no opposite between the second time unit and the first time unit.
- the possibility of the phase continuity of the transmission between the first time unit and the second time unit is provided.
- the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource. Based on the first condition, the terminal device performs data processing on the first time unit and the second time unit. When transmitting, phase continuity on different time units can be guaranteed.
- the transmission in the first time unit satisfies the first condition, that is, it indicates that the transmission in the first time unit and the transmission in the second time unit are in the same direction.
- the terminal device receives the first scheduling information, and the terminal device determines whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition according to the first scheduling information.
- the terminal device determines, based on the first scheduling information, whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition
- the terminal device determines that the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, that is, the The transmission on the two time units satisfies at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource.
- the network device Only when the network device receives the uplink data can the DMRS satisfying the phase continuity on the first time unit and the second time unit be combined, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the demodulation performance of the uplink transmission data.
- the transmission on the first time unit and the second time unit is a downstream reception:
- the terminal device determines, based on the first scheduling information, whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition
- the transmission in the first time unit satisfies the first condition, that is, the terminal device determines that the first time unit The transmission satisfies the first condition, that is, the data transmission on the first time unit and the transmission on the second time unit satisfy at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resources .
- the terminal device Only when the terminal device receives the downlink data can the DMRS satisfying the phase continuity on the first time unit and the second time unit be combined, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the demodulation performance of the uplink transmission data.
- the N time units correspond one-to-one to the N pieces of scheduling information delivered by the network device. That is, the first scheduling information is the scheduling information corresponding to the first time unit, the second scheduling information is the scheduling information corresponding to the second time unit, and the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are the same type of scheduling information.
- the above-mentioned first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information, and it can be understood that the values of the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are the same.
- the transmission in the first time unit may include that the terminal device receives downlink data in the first time unit or the terminal device sends uplink data in the first time unit.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI. That is, the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in two different DCIs.
- the first scheduling information may be a field defined by an existing protocol in the multiplexing DCI, or a newly added field defined by an existing protocol, or a reserved field defined in the existing protocol. This application implements. This example is not specifically limited.
- the embodiment of the present application uses the value of 1 bit in the DCI to determine whether the transmission in the first time unit satisfies the first condition.
- the transmission on the first time unit must satisfy the first condition, that is, the transmission on the second time unit must keep the same value.
- transmit power at least one of the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource; if the value of the field corresponding to the first scheduling information and the field corresponding to the second scheduling information are different, the first time unit
- the data transmission in the first time unit may or may not satisfy the first condition, that is, the transmission in the first time unit does not need to maintain the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port and the transmission in the second time unit.
- At least one of the same frequency domain resources For example, a field corresponding to the first scheduling information and a field corresponding to the second scheduling information are both 1 bit, and when the 1 bit is both 0 or both are 1, the transmission on the first time unit must satisfy the first condition.
- the network device sends third scheduling information to the terminal device, where the third scheduling information is used to indicate that the sending device satisfies the second condition within the first duration, and the second condition includes one or more of the following: the sending device does not turn off the power amplifier, The transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the terminal device when the terminal device sends uplink data in the first time unit and the second time unit, the terminal device is a sending device.
- the terminal device performs at least one of not turning off the power amplifier, not performing carrier frequency switching, or not performing antenna switching within the first duration;
- the network when the terminal device receives downlink data in the first time unit and the second time unit, the network The device is a sending device, and the network device performs at least one of not turning off the power amplifier, not performing carrier frequency switching, or not performing antenna switching within the first duration.
- the terminal device can perform a joint channel on the DMRS received on the first time unit and the second time unit when the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition Estimation; when the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, the terminal device also needs to indicate through the third scheduling information whether the network device satisfies the second condition during the downlink transmission process, that is, whether the network device is in the discontinuous time unit. Perform operations such as not turning off the power amplifier, not performing antenna switching, etc. When the second condition and the first condition are met, the terminal device can still perform the first time unit and the second time unit for discontinuous first time units and second time units. Joint channel estimation is performed on the DMRS received in the time unit.
- first condition and the second condition it is possible to limit that a plurality of time units can perform joint channel estimation. Specifically, it can include the following two situations:
- the first scheduling information of the first time unit is the same as the first scheduling information of the second time unit, that is, if the first condition is satisfied, then the first time unit and the second time unit can perform joint channel estimation;
- the third scheduling information corresponding to the time unit between a time unit and the second time unit is the same as the first scheduling information of the first time unit, then the time unit and the first time unit can also perform joint channel estimation. Therefore, the The time unit may perform joint channel estimation with the first time unit and the second time unit. Repeatedly recursively, a unified joint channel estimation can be performed for all multiple time units that satisfy the first condition
- the first indication information of the first time unit and the first scheduling information of the second time unit are the same, that is, the first condition is satisfied, and when the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, the If the second condition is satisfied, then the first time unit can perform joint channel estimation with the second time unit; the third scheduling information corresponding to the time unit between the first time unit and the second time unit and the first scheduling of the first time unit The information is the same, and when the second time unit and the first time unit are discontinuous, and the second condition is satisfied, then the time unit and the first time unit can also perform joint channel estimation. Therefore, the time unit and the first time unit, and The second time unit may perform joint channel estimation. By recursion one by one, a unified joint channel estimation can be performed for all multiple time units that satisfy the first condition and the second condition
- the number of time units contained in the first time unit and the second time unit may be the same or different.
- the time unit is a time slot
- the first time unit may be a plurality of consecutive time units corresponding to repeated transmission
- the second time unit A unit is a single unit of time that is transmitted non-repeatedly.
- the first scheduling information may be carried in a DCI that schedules 4 repeated transmissions. Assuming that each repeated transmission occupies 4 time slots, the first time unit includes 4 time slots for repeated transmission, and the second scheduling information carries In a DCI scheduling non-repetitive transmission, it is assumed that the non-repetitive transmission occupies 1 time slot, and the second time unit occupies 1 time slot. If the first condition and or the second condition are satisfied, joint channel estimation may be performed on the DMRS of 4 time slots included in the first time unit and 1 time slot included in the second time unit, that is, a total of 5 time slots.
- the first duration can be any of the following:
- the first time period is a period of time including the first time unit and the second time unit, and the terminal device needs to satisfy the second condition within this period of time when sending uplink data, or, when the network device sends downlink data.
- the second condition needs to be satisfied within the period of time.
- the first duration can be the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the terminal device sends the uplink data, it needs to satisfy the second condition in the time unit between the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the first duration can be understood as a periodic time period.
- the first duration may be a period of time, such as one millisecond or several milliseconds.
- the first duration may also be one or more time units, such as one or more time slots, one or more time domain symbols.
- the first duration includes a first time unit and a second time unit.
- first duration time may also have other manners or other forms, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the second condition is valid for the first duration.
- the network device can be restricted from sending downlink data or the terminal device sending uplink data within the first duration. If the time exceeds the first duration, the data transmission by the network device or the terminal device is not subject to the second condition. limit.
- the first duration is configured by the network device through radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the first duration is predefined.
- the network device configures a parameter through RRC signaling, and the value of this parameter is used to represent the duration of the first duration, or it can be understood that the value of this parameter is used to determine the effective limit time of the second condition;
- the first duration is predefined, and in this case, the network device does not need to configure and send the third scheduling information independently.
- the terminal device Before the terminal device receives the downlink data, the terminal device reports capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the number of time units for joint channel estimation that a terminal device can support is limited by the capability of the terminal device itself.
- the terminal device Before receiving downlink data, the terminal device needs to report to the network device whether it supports joint channel estimation. Or, the terminal device needs to report to the network device the maximum number of time units that it supports joint channel estimation.
- the capability information may be a field containing one or more bits, and different state values or different values of the field indicate different capability information.
- the specific indication includes the following possible ways:
- Manner 1 the capability information is 1-bit indication information, and the value of 1-bit informs the network device whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units and time units. For example, when the value of 1 bit is 1, the terminal device can satisfy the joint channel estimation of multiple time units; when the value of 1 bit is 0, the terminal device cannot support the joint channel estimation of multiple time units;
- the capability information is one parameter configured by the terminal device, and the one parameter includes multiple bits. Different values of this parameter are used to indicate the maximum number of different time units that the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation.
- the value of the one parameter can directly indicate the number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device, that is, the value of the one parameter is the same as the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation supported by the terminal device.
- the value of the capability information is 6, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the value of the one parameter may also correspond to the number of one time unit according to a predefined relationship. For example, the predefined relationship is that the value of the 1 parameter is half of the number of time units that the terminal device supports joint channel estimation at most.
- the value of the capability information is 3, indicating that the terminal device can support more Joint channel estimation for 6 time units.
- the capability information includes multiple bits of indication information, and the multiple bits include a first bit portion and a second bit portion.
- the value of the first bit indicates whether the network device terminal device supports joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the value of the second bit part indicates how many time units the terminal device can support for joint channel estimation at most.
- capability information may also have other indication manners, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device when the number of time units for joint channel estimation is less than the maximum number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support, the terminal device can perform joint channel estimation; when the time unit for joint channel estimation is required When the number of is greater than the maximum number M of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support, the terminal device cannot perform joint channel estimation, or can only perform joint channel estimation for M adjacent time units.
- the capability information indicates that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 6 time units.
- the terminal device It cannot support joint channel estimation for time units that satisfy the first condition and/or the second condition, or the terminal device can only perform joint channel estimation for 6 time units that satisfy the first condition and/or the second condition, for example: The terminal device may perform joint channel estimation on time units #1-6, perform joint channel estimation on time units #2-7, and perform joint channel estimation on time units #3-8.
- reporting the capability information by the terminal device helps the network device to schedule time domain resources for the terminal device according to the capability of the terminal device, thereby improving communication performance.
- the terminal device sends uplink data in the first time unit and the second time unit; or, the terminal device receives downlink data in the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the terminal device determines that the network device satisfies the first condition when sending downlink data, and the terminal device is based on The DMRS on the first time unit and the DMRS on the second time unit perform joint channel estimation on the first time unit and the second time unit, or, when the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, and the first time unit
- the terminal device determines that it satisfies the first condition when sending the uplink data, and correspondingly, the network device is based on the DMRS on the first time unit and the second time unit.
- DMRS performs joint channel estimation.
- the time unit may be a time slot, a subslot, a frame, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission in a subframe.
- the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit them.
- the transmission on the first time unit and the second time unit may include two situations of sending uplink data or receiving downlink data:
- Scenario 1 The following takes the terminal equipment sending uplink data as an example, when the second scheduling information corresponding to the transmission in the second time unit is 1, and the first time unit after the second time unit is also used for uplink transmission, And there is no downlink reception between the second time unit and the first time unit, then the transmission of the first time unit needs to meet the first condition, that is: when the value of the first scheduling information corresponding to the transmission at the first time is also 1, Then the transmission of the terminal device in the first time unit needs to adopt the transmission power, precoding, antenna port and frequency domain resource configuration, etc. in the second time unit, so that the transmission of the terminal device in the first time unit can keep the same as that in the first time unit.
- the network device can combine the DMRSs that satisfy the phase continuity in the first time unit and the second time unit when receiving uplink data, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the performance of uplink transmission. Data demodulation performance.
- the time unit is a time slot
- each time slot contains 14 time domain symbols
- the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission of 14 time domain symbols on the first time unit
- the PUSCH of 12 time domain symbols is sent on the second time unit
- the 13th and 14th time domain symbols of the second time unit are not used to receive downlink data, for example, the 13th and 14th time domain symbols of the second time unit are not used for receiving downlink data.
- the 14 time-domain symbols may be spare uplink or flexible time-domain symbols, or may also be two uplink time-domain symbols used for sending channel sounding reference signals.
- the terminal device determines, based on the received first scheduling information, that the transmission on the first time unit should satisfy the first condition, for the discontinuity between the first time unit and the second time unit, the terminal device also needs to be instructed to be on the discontinuous time unit.
- the second condition needs to be met, that is, the operation behavior that destroys the phase continuity of the signals sent by the first time unit and the second time unit cannot occur, for example, the terminal device cannot turn off the power amplifier (do not send signals in time), cannot perform antenna switching, etc.
- the terminal device needs to satisfy the second condition in discontinuous time units, which may be indicated by independent third scheduling information, or implicitly indicated by the first scheduling information.
- the third scheduling information and the The first scheduling information is carried in the same field, that is, when the terminal device determines that the transmission of the first time unit needs to satisfy the first condition, by default, for the case where the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, it also needs to satisfy the second condition. condition.
- Scenario 2 The following takes the network device sending downlink data as an example, when the second scheduling information corresponding to the transmission in the second time unit is 0, and when the first time unit after the second time unit is also used for downlink reception, And there is no uplink transmission between the second time unit and the first time unit, then the transmission of the first time unit needs to meet the first condition, that is: when the first scheduling information corresponding to the first time transmission is also 0.
- the transmission of the network device in the first time unit needs to adopt the transmission power, precoding, antenna port and frequency domain resource configuration in the second time unit, so that the transmission of the network device in the first time unit can maintain the same
- the terminal equipment can combine the DMRSs that satisfy the phase continuity on the first time unit and the second time unit when receiving downlink data, so as to achieve more accurate channel estimation and improve the uplink performance. Demodulation performance of transmitted data.
- the time unit is a time slot, and each time slot contains 14 time domain symbols
- the network device performs PDSCH transmission of 14 time domain symbols on the first time unit
- the PDSCH of 12 time-domain symbols is sent on the second time unit
- the 13th and 14th time-domain symbols of the second time unit are not used to send uplink data
- the 13th and 14th time-domain symbols of the second time unit are not used for sending uplink data.
- the 14 time-domain symbols may be spare downlink or flexible time-domain symbols, or may also be two downlink time-domain symbols used for receiving channel sounding reference signals.
- the terminal device determines based on the received first scheduling information that the transmission on the first time unit must satisfy the first condition, for the discontinuity between the first time unit and the second time unit, the terminal device also needs to be informed that the network device is in the discontinuous time unit.
- the second condition needs to be met on the time unit, that is, no operation behavior that destroys the phase continuity of the signals sent by the first time unit and the second time unit, for example, the network device cannot turn off the power amplifier (do not send signals in time), and cannot perform antenna switching. Wait.
- the network device needs to meet the second condition in discontinuous time units, which may be indicated by independent third scheduling information, or may be implicitly indicated by the first scheduling information.
- the third scheduling information and The first scheduling information is carried in the same field, that is, when the terminal device determines that the transmission of the first time unit needs to satisfy the first condition, by default, for the case where the first time unit and the second time unit are discontinuous, it also needs to satisfy the second condition. condition.
- the accuracy of channel estimation can be improved, the demodulation performance of data can be improved, and the transmission capability can be improved.
- the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the fourth time unit is multiple A time unit with the same number of DMRS configurations and the closest interval as the third time unit among the time units, wherein at least one fifth time unit is included between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, and the The number of DMRS configurations is less than the number of DMRS configurations on the third time unit.
- the number of DMRS configurations mentioned in the embodiments of the present application refers to the number of DMRSs, which is different from the number of time-domain symbols occupied by DMRSs, and details are not described below.
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit are separated by two time units, that is, there are two fifth time units at this time.
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit perform DMRS configuration according to the value of dmrs-AdditionalPosition as pos3, and the DMRS configuration methods on the two fifth time units can be in the following three ways:
- Mode 1 Do not configure DMRS, neither configure pre-DMRS nor additional DMRS.
- Mode 2 Only one DMRS is configured, and the one DMRS is a pre-DMRS, that is, no additional DMRS is configured at this time.
- Mode 3 Configure 2 DMRSs, that is, configure 1 pre-DMRS and 1 additional DMRS.
- the total number of pre-DMRSs and additional DMRSs in the third time unit and the fourth time unit is 4, and the total number of DMRSs in the two fifth time units is less than or equal to 2, which is less than the third time unit and the third time unit.
- the number of DMRS configurations in the fifth time unit may be indicated by a predefined network device through separate signaling, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the indication manner and the bearing location of the indication information.
- the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the number of time units of the multiple time units is K.
- the second indication information is used to indicate the number of time units for jointly configuring the number of DMRSs.
- the number of time units for determining the number of jointly configured DMRS may include the following methods:
- Mode 1 When the data blocks transmitted in each time unit in multiple time units are not identical, the non-identity can be understood as the data blocks transmitted in multiple time units are different, or it can also be understood as multiple time units. Parts of the data blocks transferred on the cells are the same, and the rest are not the same.
- the number of time units for which the number of DMRSs is jointly configured may be determined by the value of the second indication information, or the number of time units that need to be jointly configured with DMRS may be determined by an index value corresponding to the value. For example, if the value of the second indication information is 4, or the value corresponding to the index value of the second indication information is 4, it means that the terminal device has determined the joint configuration of the number of DMRSs in 4 time units;
- Mode 2 When the same data block is transmitted over multiple time units, the number of repeated transmissions of the transmission block is used to determine the number of time units of the multiple time units.
- the second indication information may or may not be sent. If sent, the second indication information is used to indicate whether to enable the function of joint channel estimation. In repeated transmission, and when the second indication information indicates that joint channel estimation is enabled, the number of time units for joint configuration of DMRS is equal to the configured number of repeated transmissions, and the number of repeated transmissions is configured by RRC signaling.
- the second indication information may have two values. The first value indicates that the terminal device enables joint channel estimation for multiple time units, and the second value indicates that the terminal device disables joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- whether to enable joint channel estimation can also be determined by using an index value corresponding to the second indication information.
- the above-mentioned corresponding relationship between the value of the second indication information and whether to enable joint channel estimation is only used for example, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the determination method and the corresponding relationship.
- the relationship between the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information and the number of multiple time units determined by the second indication information may exist in the following situations:
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit are the first and last two time units among the K time units determined by the second indication information.
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit are configured with more time units, and the fifth time unit in the middle is configured with a smaller number of DMRSs.
- the number of time units in the interval indicated by the first indication information is 4, and the number of multiple time units indicated by the second indication information is 6, then time units #1-6, the DMRS configured in time units #1 and #6 More, for example, the DMRS may be configured according to the value Pos3 of the configuration of the additional DMRS quantity; however, there are fewer DMRSs configured in the middle four time units, that is, time units #2-5.
- the third time unit is the first time unit in the K time units determined by the second indication information.
- the fourth time unit is not among the K time units.
- the third time unit is configured with more time units, and the remaining time units are configured with a smaller number of DMRSs.
- the configuration methods of the DMRS on the intermediate time unit may include the above several methods, which are not repeated here, that is, it is sufficient to ensure that the number of the DMRS on the intermediate time unit is less than the number of DMRS configured on the third time unit.
- the number of time units in the interval indicated by the first indication information is 5, and the number of multiple time units indicated by the second indication information is 6, then in time units #1-6, more DMRSs are configured in time unit 1,
- the DMRS may be configured according to the value Pos3 of the configuration of the additional DMRS quantity; however, there are fewer DMRSs configured on the subsequent five time units, that is, time units #2-6.
- the number of DMRSs configured on time slots #2-6 when the number of DMRSs configured on time slots #2-6 is small, more DMRSs can be configured on time slot 1, even more than 4 DMRSs, that is, time slot 1
- the number of additional DMRSs configured above can exceed 3. It only needs to satisfy that the total DMRS overhead on the six time slots is not too large.
- the DMRS that can be configured on time slots #2-6 are uniformly configured on time slot 1, so the terminal device or network device can use it after receiving the DMRS on time slot 1 and concentrate it on one time slot.
- the multiple DMRSs are used for fast and accurate channel estimation, which not only reduces the time delay but also improves the efficiency of demodulation data at the receiving end.
- Scenario 3 The number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit indicated by the first indication information is less than the number of multiple time units determined by the second indication information minus 2:
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit are any two time units among the K time units determined by the second indication information.
- the third time unit and the fourth time unit are configured with more time units, and the remaining time units are configured with a smaller number of DMRSs.
- the configuration modes of the DMRS on the time unit of the intermediate interval may have the above-mentioned several modes, which will not be repeated here, that is, it is ensured that the number of the upper DMRS on the intermediate time unit is less than the number of DMRS configured on the third time unit and the fourth time unit. .
- the number of time units in the interval indicated by the first indication information is 2, and the number of multiple time units indicated by the second indication information is 6, then in time units #1-6, the time units #1 and #4 are configured in time units #1 and #4.
- the DMRSs may be configured according to the value Pos3 of the configuration of the additional DMRS quantity; and the remaining four time units, namely, time units #2, #3, and #5, are configured with fewer DMRSs.
- FIG. 3 shows several situations of configuring the number of additional DMRSs in four time slots in the embodiment of the present application.
- each time unit can be configured with up to 2 additional DMRSs.
- the time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1 0
- the time domain symbols occupied by the two additional DMRSs are 7 and 11 respectively
- each DMRS occupies one time domain symbol.
- the number of time units determined by the second indication information configured by the network device is 4, which means that the terminal device performs joint configuration on the additional DMRS on the 4 time units, that is, on the 4 time slots.
- the RRC signaling instructs the terminal to use the same DMRS configuration information for K time units, each of the four time slots is configured with DMRS, and the four time slots are configured with DMRS.
- the number of additional DMRSs are all the same.
- the first indication information indicates that the DMRS is configured every time unit, that is, the number of time intervals between the time slots in which the same number of DMRSs are configured is one.
- the configuration of the additional DMRS on the second slot and the fourth slot is canceled, and only the pre-DMRS is configured on the second slot and the fourth slot;
- the first indication information indicates that the DMRS is only configured every 1 time unit, that is, the time interval between the time slots in which the same number of DMRSs are configured is 1.
- there is another configuration mode As shown in Figure 4(c), all DMRS configurations in the second time slot and the fourth time slot are canceled, that is, neither pre-DMRS nor additional DMRS are configured.
- the interval time unit adopts the minimum DMRS configuration density, that is, only the pre-DMRS is configured in the second time slot, and neither the pre-DMRS nor the additional DMRS is configured in the fourth time slot.
- the specific configuration mode to be adopted may be predefined, or determined by using additional indication information, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the determination of the configuration mode.
- the terminal device reports first capability information to the network device, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of at most M time units, wherein , M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the number of time units for joint channel estimation that a terminal device can support is limited and depends on the capabilities of the terminal device.
- the terminal device Before the network device indicates the number of time units for joint channel estimation to the terminal device, the terminal device will actively report its own capability information to the network device. For example, a terminal device configures a parameter through RRC signaling, and the value of the parameter is 4, indicating that the terminal device can support joint channel estimation of up to 4 time slots, and can also indicate joint channel estimation of 4 sub-slots.
- This application implements This example is not specifically limited.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the terminal device does not expect that the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated in the indication information delivered by the network device is equal to the number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support. For example, when the same data block is transmitted on multiple time units, the network device determines the number of time units for joint channel estimation by configuring the number of repeated transmissions of the data block, and the determined number of time units at this time may be the same as the number of joint channels supported by the terminal device.
- the estimated number of time units is not equal; or, when the data blocks transmitted on multiple time units are not identical, the number of time units determined by the network device by sending the second indication information may be the same as the time unit estimated by the joint channel supported by the terminal device.
- the quantities are not equal.
- the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device when the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device is less than or equal to the number of time units for joint channel estimation that can be supported by the terminal device, the number of time units for joint channel estimation should be based on the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device.
- the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device is greater than the number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support, the number of time units for joint channel estimation should be based on the number of time units that the terminal device can support. The number of time units for channel estimation shall prevail.
- the terminal device when the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device is greater than the number of time units for joint channel estimation that the terminal device can support, for example, the number of time units for joint channel estimation indicated by the network device is 8 time slots, the terminal device The number of time units that can be supported for joint channel estimation is 4 slots.
- the related operations for the terminal equipment to perform joint channel estimation include the following two ways:
- Mode 1 The terminal equipment performs "truncation" processing on the joint channel estimation of 8 time slots. That is, the terminal device first performs the operation of joint channel estimation of time slots #1-4, and then performs the operation of joint channel estimation of time slots #5-8. Taking the terminal equipment receiving downlink data as an example, the terminal equipment uses the DMRS configured on the time slots #1-4 to perform joint channel estimation, and based on the estimated channel, completes the demodulation of the data received on the time slots #1-4, and then Joint channel estimation is performed using the DMRS configured on the time slots #5-8, and based on the estimated channel, the demodulation of the data received on the time slots #5-8 is completed.
- Mode 2 The terminal equipment performs "sliding" processing on the joint channel estimation of 8 time slots. That is, the terminal device first performs the operation of joint channel estimation of time slots #1-4; then stores the DMRS information in time slot #5 and deletes the DMRS information in the stored time slot #1, and the terminal device executes #5, # 2. Operation of joint channel estimation of 4 time slots in #3 and #4 time slots; then the DMRS information stored in time slot #6 will delete the DMRS information in stored time slot 2 at the same time, and the terminal equipment will execute #5 , #6, #3, #4 timeslots for a total of 4 timeslots for joint channel estimation operations, and so on.
- Which joint channel estimation method the terminal device adopts may be predefined, or may be indicated by additional indication information, or other methods except the above two methods, which are neither specifically limited nor indicated in this embodiment of the present application.
- the bearing location of the information is specifically limited.
- the terminal device can determine the value of the number of time units for joint channel estimation, that is, the number of time units for jointly configuring the number of DMRSs, to be K, or determine the interval between time units for configuring a larger number of DMRSs.
- first indication information and second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling, and the carrying positions thereof are not specifically limited in this embodiment.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the time-domain symbol centered on the j-th time unit, and the j-th time domain symbol is centered on the j-th time unit.
- the number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of a certain time unit, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the "centered" time-domain symbol to be the most Some time domain symbol in the middle.
- the position of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the m/2th time domain symbol on the jth time unit.
- the rounding method can be predefined or determined through additional indication information, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the time domain symbols occupied by the PUSCH currently scheduled by the network device are 14, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the jth time unit above is 14.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS can be the 7th time domain symbol, or the 6th or 8th time domain symbol, that is, it is guaranteed that the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time domain symbol. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the position of the centered time-domain symbol.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preceding pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling.
- the network device sends additional indication information to the terminal device, where the information is used to determine the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS may also be predefined, and in this case, the indication of additional indication information is not required. .
- the time unit mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be a time slot, or a sub-slot sub-slot, and may also refer to a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. .
- the terminal equipment When the terminal equipment jointly estimates the channel quality of the PDSCH, after the terminal receives the above-mentioned indication information, the terminal equipment demodulates the downlink data sent by the network equipment according to the DMRS on each of the K time units;
- the DMRS is configured in the manner determined by the above indication information when each of the K time units sends uplink data.
- the uplink data is demodulated.
- the above-mentioned indication information can also indicate the joint configuration of the total number of DMRSs in the K time units, and the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the pre-DMRS and the additional DMRS; the above-mentioned indication information can indicate the change of the number of additional DMRSs in the K time units
- the above-mentioned indication information in terms of the value of the dmrs-additionnal position field configured by the RRC signaling can also indicate the change of the total number of DMRSs in the K time units, or Indicating the number of pre-DMRSs, or the variation of pre-DMRSs, etc., the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the types of information on the number of DMRSs that can be indicated by the RRC signaling.
- the network device or the terminal device can determine the combination of the number of DMRSs in K time units through the above-mentioned indication information. configuration to improve the spectral efficiency of the system to reasonably allocate the DMRS overhead.
- the network device sends the first downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the first DCI is used to indicate the first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to the DMRS configuration pattern set, and the first DMRS pattern is used to indicate the K time units
- the number of DMRS configurations is different, and the number of DMRS configurations on at least two time units in the K time units is different, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the determination of the value of K includes the following situations:
- Case 1 The value of K is specified in the protocol.
- a future protocol may stipulate that within a period of time or within several time units scheduled by the network device, the number of time units corresponding to each DMRS configuration pattern is K;
- the value of K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information. That is, the network device indicates the first DMRS configuration pattern through the first DCI, and then informs the terminal device of the number of time units corresponding to the first DMRS configuration pattern through additional indication information.
- the value of the indication information or the corresponding index value is used to determine the value of K, and the indication information may be located in RRC signaling or DCI, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the indication method and its bearing location.
- the additional indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data block
- the indication information is used to indicate whether to enable the function of joint channel estimation.
- the number of time units required to jointly configure the DMRS is equal to the configured number of repeated transmissions, which is configured by RRC signaling.
- the indication information may have two values. The first value indicates that the terminal device enables joint channel estimation for multiple time units, and the second value indicates that the terminal device disables joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- whether to enable joint channel estimation can also be determined by the index value corresponding to the indication information.
- the corresponding relationship between the value of the indication information and whether to enable joint channel estimation is only used for example, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the determination method and the corresponding relationship.
- the indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks in the K time units.
- the non-identical transmission blocks can be understood as K time units.
- the data blocks to be transmitted are different from each other, and it can also be understood that the data blocks transmitted in the K time units are partly the same and partly different.
- the second type The RRC signaling configuration parameter dmrs-Additional Position is Pos2-Pos0...-Pos0.
- the third type: RRC signaling configuration parameter dmrs-Additional Position is Pos2-Pos0-...-Pos0-Pos2.
- the K value is determined in combination with the predefined or indicated by the network device through additional indication information or the number of value contents in the first DMRS configuration pattern. , the terminal device finally determines that each time unit in the K time units adopts a uniform configuration of the number of additional DMRSs;
- the K value is determined in combination with the predefined or indicated by the network device through the fourth indication information or the number of value contents in the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the terminal device finally determines that the first time unit in the K time units adopts a larger number of DMRS configurations, and the subsequent time units adopt a fewer DMRS configuration, that is, the "front dense and rear sparse" DMRS configuration pattern.
- the terminal device When the first DMRS indicated by the terminal device through the first DCI index is the third pattern, the K value determined in combination with the predefined or indicated by the network device through the fourth indication information or the number of value contents in the first DMRS configuration pattern , the terminal device finally determines that among the K time units, the first and last time units use more DMRS configuration, and the middle time units use less DMRS configuration, that is, the "front and rear dense, middle sparse" DMRS configuration pattern.
- the terminal device does not expect the K value determined by the first DMRS indicated by the first DCI to be equal to the predefined K value or the K value indicated by the network device through additional indication information.
- the set of DMRS configuration patterns includes at least two different DMRS configuration patterns.
- the distribution of the L types of DMRS configuration patterns has the following possibilities:
- the L types of DMRS configuration patterns include L types of DMRS configuration patterns on K 1 time units, that is, there may be L types of DMRS configuration patterns on L 1 time units;
- the DMRS configuration pattern set may be a configuration set of the number of DMRSs.
- the first DCI may be used to index the configuration scheme of the number of additional DMRSs in K time units, the first DCI may also be used to index the configuration scheme of the variation of the number of additional DMRSs in K time units, or the K time units.
- the configuration scheme of the total number of DMRSs in the unit, or the configuration scheme of the variation of the total number of DMRSs in K time units, or the configuration scheme of the number of pre-DMRS, or the configuration scheme of the variation of the pre-DMRS, etc. , the content that can be indexed is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the RRC may include 4 ⁇ K different Configuration scheme for the number of additional DMRSs;
- the possible values of the number of additional DMRSs in one slot are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇
- the two time slots can have a maximum of 4 ⁇ 2 and a total of 16 configuration schemes
- any one or more time slots in the K time slots so that the number of DMRSs in the one time slot or multiple time slots is the number of additional DMRSs and takes a value of ⁇ 0, Values other than 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , that is, neither pre-DMRS nor additional DMRS are configured.
- the set of configuration schemes for the number of additional DMRSs configured by the RRC may include various combinations of the above.
- RRC may include 2 ⁇ K different configuration schemes for the number of additional DMRSs at this time;
- the RRC signaling configuration parameter dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot ⁇ Pos s1 at this time , Pos s2...Pos sK ⁇
- the possible values of the number of additional DMRSs in each of the K time slots are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇
- the RRC may include 2 ⁇ K different additional The configuration scheme of the number of DMRS;
- the possible value of the number of additional DMRSs in one slot is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
- the possible value of the number of additional DMRSs in another slot is If the value is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , the two time slots can have up to 4 configuration schemes of 2 ⁇ 2;
- any one or more time slots in the K time slots so that the number of DMRSs in the one time slot or multiple time slots is the number of additional DMRSs and takes a value of ⁇ 0, Values other than 1 ⁇ , that is, neither pre-DMRS nor additional DMRS are configured.
- Various additional DMRS configuration schemes for RRC configuration may include various combinations of the above.
- maxLength can only have one value, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRSs in each time slot of the L configuration schemes is the same; of course, L In the configuration scheme with the additional number of DMRSs, maxLength can have two values, that is, in each configuration scheme, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRSs of the K time slots is different, and the value of maxLength is not affected in this embodiment of the present application. Specific restrictions.
- the above-mentioned DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by RRC signaling.
- the network device needs to send RRC signaling to the terminal device.
- the foregoing DMRS configuration pattern set is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the network equipment pre-defined multiple configuration scheme sets of additional DMRS numbers have been embedded into the terminal equipment, so the network equipment may not send RRC signaling to the terminal equipment. Signaling overhead on the network device side.
- the first DCI is used to indicate the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the network device sends MAC CE signaling to the terminal device
- the MAC CE signaling is used to activate the terminal device according to the index value of the first DCI, from the DMRS configuration
- a first DMRS configuration pattern is determined in the pattern set.
- the terminal device still follows the parameters configured by the RRC signaling.
- the values of parameters such as dmrs-additionalPosition and max Length are used to configure the DMRS of each time unit, and perform uplink transmission or downlink reception.
- the terminal device may index the DMRS configuration pattern according to the value of the bit included in the first DCI.
- Table 3 shows the correspondence between the value of 5 bits of the first DCI and the number of additional DMRSs on K time slots when the value of maxlenth is len1, taking the first DCI including 5 bits as an example.
- the RRC signaling is configured with two values of dmrs-additionalPosition, that is, the first DCI
- the configuration pattern indicated at this time is a joint configuration for two time slots, and the number of preamble DMRSs in the first time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRSs is 0; the number of preamble DMRSs in the second time slot is 0 , the number of additional DMRSs is also 0.
- the RRC signaling is configured with 3 values of dmrs-additionalPosition, that is, the configuration pattern indicated by the first DCI at this time is for The joint configuration of 3 time slots, and the number of pre-DMRS in the first time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRS is 1; the number of pre-DMRS in the second time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRS is 0; The number of pre-DMRSs in each slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRSs is zero.
- Table 4 shows the correspondence between the value of 5 bits in the first DCI and the number of additional DMRSs in K time slots when the value of maxlenth is len2, taking 5 bits included in the first DCI as an example.
- the RRC signaling is configured with 3 values of dmrs-additionalPosition, that is, the first DCI
- the configuration pattern indicated at this time is a joint configuration for 3 time slots, and the number of preamble DMRSs in the first time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRSs is 1; the number of preamble DMRSs in the second time slot is 1 , the number of additional DMRSs is 0; the number of pre-DMRSs in the third time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRSs is 0.
- the configuration pattern indicated by the first DCI at this time is for 4 dmrs-additionalPosition values.
- the joint configuration of time slots, and the number of pre-DMRS in the first time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRS is 1; the number of pre-DMRS in the second time slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRS is 0; The number of pre-DMRSs in the slot is 1, the number of additional DMRSs is 1, and the number of pre-DMRSs in the fourth slot is 1, and the number of additional DMRSs is 1.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
- the RRC signaling is configured with 3 values of dmrs-additionalPosition, that is, the first DCI indicates at this time
- the configuration pattern is for the joint configuration of 3 time slots, and only one pre-DMRS is configured on the second time slot, then the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS on this time slot is the second time slot. Centered time domain symbols.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of a certain time unit, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the "centered" time-domain symbol to be the most Some time domain symbol in the middle.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS may be the seventh time domain symbol
- the time-domain symbol may also be the sixth or eighth time-domain symbol, that is, it is sufficient to ensure that the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is a centered time-domain symbol.
- This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the position of the centered time-domain symbol.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling.
- the network device needs to send RRC signaling to the terminal device to determine the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS;
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the network device does not need to send the RRC signaling of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS to the terminal device.
- the number of DMRSs that can actually be configured in each time unit is limited by the number of time domain symbols occupied by the PUSCH or PDSCH in each time unit. Therefore, the use of the bit value proposed in the embodiments of the present application to determine the information on the number of DMRSs in the time unit The technical solution is for the maximum number of possible configurations of DMRS in this time unit.
- time unit mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be a time slot or a sub-slot, and may also refer to a time domain resource occupied by a data block transmission, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device When the terminal device jointly estimates the channel quality of the PDSCH, after the terminal receives the first DCI, the terminal device demodulates the downlink data sent by the network device according to the DMRS of each time unit in the K time units;
- the network device jointly estimates the channel quality of the PUSCH, after the terminal device receives the first DCI, the DMRS is configured in the above manner when sending uplink data in each of the K time units, and the network device performs the uplink data sent by the terminal device. demodulation.
- the terminal device can determine the K number of time units according to the first DCI
- a configuration of the number of DMRSs in a time unit can flexibly configure the number of additional DMRSs in the K time units, so as to reasonably allocate the DMRS overhead.
- the network device sends the first information to the terminal device.
- the first information is used to indicate that the same transmit power is used on K time units or that joint channel estimation is performed on K time units.
- a maximum of one additional channel is configured on each of the K time units indicated by the first information.
- the demodulation reference signal DMRS where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- the number of additional DMRSs on each time unit in the K time units is configured to be at most 1, that is, the candidate value of the additional DMRS is only 1. Can be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . Because during joint channel estimation, compared with the number of DMRSs in a single time unit, there are already more DMRSs available, so there is no need to configure 2 or 3 additional DMRSs in each time unit, which reduces the DMRS overhead.
- K is greater than the first threshold value.
- the network device is also configured with a first threshold value, when K time units perform joint channel estimation, when K is greater than the first threshold value, the additional DMRS on each time unit in the K time units
- the number of can be configured at most 1, that is, the candidate value of the additional DMRS can only be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . Because during joint channel estimation, there are already more DMRSs available than the number of DMRSs in a single time unit, and there is no need to configure 2 or 3 additional DMRSs per time unit, which reduces the DMRS overhead.
- the first threshold value may be predefined
- the first threshold value is indicated by the network device through the second information.
- the first information and the second information may be carried in the same piece of signaling or different signaling, such as RRC signaling and DCI. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
- the first threshold value is equal to K
- at most one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is also configured on each time unit in the K time units at this time.
- the possible values of the first threshold value may be 2, 4, 8, etc., and the first threshold value is greater than or equal to 2.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of a certain time unit, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the "centered" time-domain symbol to be the most Some time domain symbol in the middle.
- the time domain symbols occupied by the PUSCH currently scheduled by the network device are 14, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the jth time unit above is 14.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS can be the 7th time domain symbol, or the 6th or 8th time domain symbol, that is, it is guaranteed that the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time domain symbol. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the position of the centered time-domain symbol.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling.
- the network device needs to send RRC signaling to the terminal device to determine the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS;
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the network device does not need to send the RRC signaling of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS to the terminal device.
- time unit in this step may be a time slot, a sub-slot, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission, the meaning of which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the first information proposed in the embodiment of the present application determines the number of DMRSs in the time unit.
- the technical solution is for the maximum number of DMRSs that can be configured in the time unit at this time.
- the terminal equipment When the terminal equipment jointly estimates the channel quality of the PDSCH, after the terminal equipment receives the first information, the terminal equipment demodulates the downlink data sent by the network equipment according to the number of DMRSs in each of the N time units;
- the terminal equipment When the network equipment jointly estimates the channel quality of the PUSCH, after receiving the first information, the terminal equipment configures the number of DMRSs in the above manner when sending uplink data in each of the K time units. data is demodulated.
- the network device or the terminal device can indicate the configuration of the number of DMRSs in the K time units through the first information, thereby reducing the total overhead of the DMRS, ensuring sufficient channel estimation accuracy, and improving transmission efficiency and performance.
- the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used for quantity information of DMRSs on each of the N time units.
- the third indication information includes N values, and the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units.
- the ith value corresponds to the quantity information of DMRSs in the ith time unit of the N time units, where i and N are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N.
- the i-th value is determined by 1 bit; when the maxLength value is len1, the i-th value is determined by 2 bits.
- the i-th value is determined by at least 1 bit; when the maxLength value is len1, the i-th value is determined by at least 2 bits.
- This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of bits used to determine the i-th value.
- bearing location of the third indication information includes the following two ways:
- the third indication information is carried in the RRC signaling.
- the third indication information includes N values, which are ⁇ Pos s1, Pos s2, Pos s3, ..., Pos sN ⁇ , and each value corresponds to The position of the additional DMRS on each time unit in the N time units, the value of Pos si corresponds to the quantity information of the additional DMRS on the ith time unit in the N time units.
- the network device or the terminal device can flexibly configure the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information.
- sufficient channel estimation accuracy can be guaranteed on the one hand, and lower DMRS overhead can be guaranteed on the other hand, which helps to improve transmission efficiency and performance.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI, the third indication information includes N groups of bits, the N groups of bits are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value in the N values corresponds to the N groups of bits.
- the i-th group of bits that is, the i-th value is determined by the i-th group of bits.
- the network device or the terminal device can indicate the configuration of the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the third indication information carried on the DCI, which realizes the dynamic adjustment of the number of DMRS configurations and reduces the delay.
- the quantity information of DMRSs includes any one of the following information types: the quantity of additional DMRSs, the total quantity of DMRSs, the variation of the quantity of additional DMRSs, the variation of the total quantity of DMRSs, wherein the total quantity of DMRSs is the additional quantity of DMRSs.
- the sum of the number of DMRSs and the number of preamble DMRSs, the type of the number of DMRSs is predefined, or the type of the number of DMRSs is indicated by the network device through configuration information.
- the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the type of the DMRS quantity information is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including determining the DMRS quantity information by using the value of the configuration information or the index value of the value.
- Type the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the indication manner. If the network device does not send the information to the terminal device, or the value of the indication information is default, the default i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, and S720 is: optional step.
- the type of the quantity information of the DMRS is indicated by the network device through the configuration information, including using the value of the configuration information or the index value of the value to determine the type of the quantity information of the DMRS,
- This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the indication manner, and at this time, S720 is a necessary step.
- the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit in the N time units, including two possible situations:
- Scenario 1 When the i-th value is determined by 1 bit, the candidate value of 1-bit at this time is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , respectively representing the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit: ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
- the maximum allowable value of the total number of DMRSs in the i-th time unit is ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ ; if the pre-DMRS is not configured on the i-th time unit, then The maximum allowable value of the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ ;
- Scenario 2 At this time, when the i-th value is determined by 2 bits, the candidate values of 1-bit are ⁇ 00, 01, 10, 11 ⁇ , respectively representing the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit: ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
- the maximum allowable value of the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit is ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ ; if not configured on the i-th time unit If the DMRS is prepended, the maximum allowable value of the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit is ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
- the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the pre-DMRS is not configured on the i-th time unit.
- the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit by default.
- the ith value can also be used to indicate the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit, including two possible situations:
- the total number of DMRSs is the sum of the number of preamble DMRSs and the number of additional DMRSs.
- Case 1 When the i-th value is indicated by 1 bit, the value of 1-bit is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ respectively representing that the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit at this time is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
- the indication information can be indicated by RRC signaling or by DCI, including fields newly added by DCI. Or multiplexing redundant fields in DCI, wherein multiplexing redundant fields of DCI can reduce signaling overhead. This application does not specifically limit the bearing location of the indication information;
- Scenario 2 When the i-th value is indicated by 2 bits, the 2-bit values are ⁇ 00, 01, 10, 11 ⁇ , respectively representing that the total number of DMRSs in the i-th time unit is ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
- the indication information can multiplex the redundant fields of the RRC signaling, and can also multiplex the redundant fields of the DCI, wherein, Multiplexing redundant fields of DCI can reduce signaling overhead. This application does not specifically limit the bearing location of the indication information.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the change amount of the additional DMRS on the i-th time unit.
- the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs is based on the value of the dmrs-Additional Position configured by the high-level signaling, and the ith value is used to indicate that the number of additional DMRSs in the ith time unit is based on the dmrs-Additional Position.
- Algebraic calculations can include the following two situations:
- the i-th value is used to indicate that the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit is calculated by adding and subtracting the dmrs-Additional Position value configured by the higher layer signaling.
- the i-th time unit is configured with pre-DMRS. If the calculation result of the number of additional DMRSs is less than 0, it means that only the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit, and the number of additional DMRS is 0; if the calculation result of the number of additional DMRS > 0, then the calculation result at this time is the number of additional DMRS;
- no pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit. If the calculation result of the number of additional DMRSs is less than 0, it means that neither the pre-DMRS nor the additional DMRS are configured on the i-th time unit; if the calculation result of the number of additional DMRSs is configured >0, the calculation result at this time is the total number of DMRS.
- the network device sends fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit.
- the i-th value can also be used to indicate that the additional DMRS quantity of the i-th time unit performs multiplication and division calculations on the dmrs-Additional Position value of the high-level signaling configuration, and two possible calculation results are briefly described below. explain:
- a possible calculation result when the indication result of the i-th value is that the number of additional DMRS is a decimal, it can be rounded up or down, and the round up or down can be predefined or can be
- the additional signaling indication passed through is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application;
- Another possible calculation result if the indication result of the i-th value is that the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit is greater than 1 (DMRS occupies two time domain symbols continuously) or greater than 3 (DMRS occupies 1 time domain symbols), the actual maximum number of additional DMRSs that can be configured on the i-th time unit is still 1 or 3.
- the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs refers to the number of additional DMRSs configured in RRC signaling, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of additional DMRSs configured in RRC signaling.
- the ith value is used to indicate the change amount of the total number of DMRSs in the ith time unit.
- the variation of the total number of DMRSs is based on the value of the dmrs-Additional Position configured by the high-level signaling, and the ith value is used to indicate that the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit is based on the dmrs-Additional Position.
- the corresponding algebraic calculation can specifically include the following two situations:
- the i-th value is used to indicate that the total number of DMRSs on the i-th time unit is calculated by adding and subtracting the dmrs-Additional Position value configured by the higher layer signaling.
- the calculation result of the total number of DMRSs is less than 0, it means that neither the pre-DMRS nor the number of additional DMRSs are configured in the i-th time unit; if the calculation result of the total number of DMRSs is greater than 0, the calculation result at this time is the total number of DMRS;
- the calculation result of the total number of DMRSs is greater than 0, such as 1, it can be understood that 1 pre-DMRS is configured on the ith time unit; if the calculation result of the total number of DMRSs is 2, it can be understood that at the ith time 1 pre-DMRS and 1 additional DMRS are configured on the unit; if the calculation result of the total number of DMRS is 3, it can be understood that 1 pre-DMRS and 2 additional DMRS are configured on the i-th time unit, and so on .
- the i-th value can also be used to indicate that the additional DMRS quantity of the i-th time unit performs multiplication and division calculations on the dmrs-Additional Position value of the high-level signaling configuration, and two possible calculation results are briefly described below. explain:
- a possible calculation result when the indication result of the i-th value is that the total number of DMRS is a decimal, it can be rounded up or down, and the round up or down can be predefined or can be
- the additional signaling indication passed through is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application;
- Another possible calculation result if the indication result of the i-th value is that the total number of DMRSs in the i-th time unit is greater than 2 (DMRS occupies two time domain symbols continuously) or greater than 4 (DMRS occupies 1 time domain symbol), the actual maximum total number of DMRSs that can be configured in the i-th time unit is still 2 or 4.
- the variation of the total number of DMRSs is for the number of additional DMRSs configured by RRC signaling, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of additional DMRSs configured by RRC signaling.
- the terminal device or the network device configures the number of additional DMRSs or the number of DMRSs in N time units according to the third indication information
- the total number that is, the value of the number of additional DMRSs that the DCI covers the original RRC signaling configuration
- the terminal device or the network device When the third indication information is used to indicate the variation information of the number of additional DMRSs in N time units or the variation information of the total number of DMRSs in N time units, the terminal device or the network device, according to the third indication information, combines the original Algebraic calculation is performed on the value of the additional DMRS quantity configured in the RRC signaling to configure the additional DMRS quantity or the total DMRS quantity in N time units.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
- the "centered" time-domain symbol refers to any possible time-domain symbol in the middle third of a certain time unit, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the "centered" time-domain symbol to be the most Some time domain symbol in the middle.
- the time domain symbols occupied by the PUSCH currently scheduled by the network device are 14, that is, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the jth time unit above is 14.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS can be the 7th time domain symbol, or the 6th or 8th time domain symbol, that is, it is guaranteed that the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time domain symbol. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the position of the centered time-domain symbol.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling.
- the network device needs to send RRC signaling to the terminal device to determine the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS;
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the network device does not need to send the RRC signaling of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the preamble DMRS to the terminal device.
- time unit in this step may be a time slot or a sub-slot, and may also refer to a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the third indication information proposed in the embodiment of the present application determines each time
- the technical solution for the number of DMRSs on a unit is for the maximum number of DMRSs that can be configured on a time unit at this time.
- the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information may be indicated by RRC signaling, or may be indicated by DCI, including using a newly added field of DCI or multiplexing redundant fields of DCI, wherein the redundancy of DCI is multiplexed.
- the field can reduce signaling overhead, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit its bearing location.
- the terminal equipment When the terminal equipment jointly estimates the channel quality of the PDSCH, after the terminal receives the above-mentioned indication information, the terminal equipment demodulates the downlink data sent by the network equipment according to the number of DMRSs in each of the N time units;
- the network equipment jointly estimates the channel quality of the PUSCH, after the terminal equipment receives the above-mentioned indication information, configures the number of DMRSs in the manner indicated by the above-mentioned indication information when sending uplink data in each of the N time units.
- the uplink data sent by the device is demodulated.
- the network device or the terminal device can flexibly configure the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the above-mentioned indication information.
- the network device or the terminal device can flexibly configure the number of DMRSs in the N time units through the above-mentioned indication information.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 800 includes a transceiving unit 810 and a processing unit 820, the transceiving unit 810 can communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 820 is used for data processing.
- Transceiver unit 810 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit.
- the terminal device communication apparatus may further include a storage unit, where the storage unit may be used to store instructions or/or data, and the processing unit 820 may read the instructions or/or data in the storage unit.
- the communication apparatus 800 may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal equipment in the above method embodiments.
- the communication apparatus 800 may be a terminal equipment or a component that can be configured in the terminal equipment, and the transceiver unit 810 is used to perform the above-mentioned actions.
- the processing unit 820 is configured to perform the operations related to the processing on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown above.
- the communication apparatus 800 is configured to perform the actions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 800 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 800 includes:
- Transceiving unit 810 configured to receive first scheduling information sent by the network device, where the first scheduling information is used to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition;
- Processing unit 820 used to determine whether the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, wherein the first scheduling information is the same as the second scheduling information of the second unit time unit, and the The transmission satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information is different from the second scheduling information of the second time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit does not satisfy the first condition;
- the second time unit is the time unit before the first time unit, the transmission direction on the first time unit and the second time unit is the same, and there is no transmission in the opposite direction between the second time unit and the first time unit,
- the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to: send uplink data on the first time unit and the second time unit; or receive downlink data on the first time unit and the second time unit.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to receive third scheduling information sent by the network device, where the third scheduling information is used to indicate that the sending device satisfies a second condition within the first duration, and the second condition includes one or more of the following: kind:
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the second condition is valid within a first duration
- the first duration is configured by the network device through radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the first duration is predefined.
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to: report capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate whether the communication apparatus can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the communication apparatus 800 is configured to perform the actions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 800 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 800 includes:
- the transceiver unit 810 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, where the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the fourth The time unit is a time unit that has the same DMRS configuration quantity and the closest interval as the third time unit among the multiple time units, wherein at least one fifth time unit is included between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, and the fifth time unit is The number of DMRS configurations on the time unit is less than the number of DMRS configurations on the third time unit; the processing unit 820 is configured to determine the number of demodulation reference signal DMRS configurations on multiple time units according to the first indication information.
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to receive second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the number of time units of the multiple time units is K, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data blocks; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks on the K time units; or,
- the K time units include multiple data blocks, and the multiple data blocks are partially identical and partially different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to: report first capability information to the network device, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support at most M time units. Joint channel estimation, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the configuration information of the number of DMRSs includes any one of configuration information of the additional number of DMRSs, configuration information of the total number of DMRSs, configuration information of the variation of the additional number of DMRSs, or configuration information of the variation of the total number of DMRSs.
- the communication apparatus 800 is configured to perform the actions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 800 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 800 includes:
- the transceiver unit 810 is configured to receive first downlink control information DCI sent by a network device, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern set includes at least two different DMRS configuration patterns; the processing unit 820 is configured to determine, according to the first DMRS configuration pattern, the configuration quantities of the DMRSs on the K time units, wherein the configuration quantities of the DMRSs on at least two time units in the K time units are different, K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is predefined, or K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information, or K is determined by the number of value contents in the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the additional indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data blocks; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the additional indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks in the K time units; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are partly the same and partly different, and the additional indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks in the K time units.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling or is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to: receive the medium access control layer control element MAC CE signaling sent by the network device, and the MAC CE signaling is used to activate communication.
- the apparatus determines the first DMRS configuration pattern from the set of DMRS configuration patterns according to the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the center time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the K time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the first DMRS configuration pattern includes any one of a configuration pattern of an additional number of DMRSs, a configuration pattern of a total number of DMRSs, a change amount configuration pattern of the additional DMRS number, or a configuration pattern of a change amount of the total number of DMRSs.
- the communication apparatus 800 is configured to perform the actions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 800 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 800 includes:
- the transceiver unit 810 is configured to receive the first information sent by the network device, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmit power is used in the K time units or to perform joint channel estimation in the K time units; the processing unit 820 is used for It is determined according to the first information that at most one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured on each of the K time units, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is greater than the first threshold value.
- the first threshold value is predefined or indicated by the second information.
- the first message and the second message may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signaling.
- the first information is carried in DCI or RRC signaling.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the K time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the communication apparatus 800 is configured to perform the actions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 800 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 800 includes:
- the transceiver unit 810 is configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, where the third indication information includes N values, where the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value in the N parameters is used for Indicates the quantity information of the demodulation reference signal DMRS on the i-th time unit in the N time units, wherein i and N are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N; the processing unit 820 is used for according to the third indication The information determines the number of DMRS information on each of the N time units.
- the third indication information includes N groups of bits, the N groups of bits are in one-to-one correspondence with N time units, and the i-th value in the N parameters corresponds to the i-th group of bits in the N groups of bits.
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits; or,
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the quantity information of DMRSs includes any one of the following information types: the quantity of additional DMRSs, the total quantity of DMRSs, the variation of the quantity of additional DMRSs, the variation of the total quantity of DMRSs, wherein the total quantity of DMRSs is the additional quantity of DMRSs.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to receive configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the third indication information is carried in the RRC signaling, and the type of the DMRS quantity information is predefined. kind of.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to receive the fourth indication information sent by the network device, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the i-th time unit.
- No pre-DMRS is configured on each time unit.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the variation of the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit 810 is further configured to receive the fifth indication information sent by the network device, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate Whether the pre-DMRS is configured on the i-th time unit.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI, and the processing unit 820 is configured to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit according to the third indication information, where the i-th value is used to indicate the i-th time unit. the number of additional DMRS on; or,
- the processing unit 820 is configured to determine the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information, where the ith value is used to indicate the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit; or,
- the processing unit 820 is configured to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit according to the third indication information and the RRC signaling, where the i-th value is used to indicate the variation of the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit, RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the ith time; or,
- the processing unit 820 is configured to determine the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit according to the third indication information and the RRC signaling, wherein the ith value is used to indicate the variation of the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit, RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the ith time.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the N time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than N.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the N time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- terminal device 800 may correspond to the terminal device of the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each unit in the terminal device 800 are respectively for implementing the corresponding steps of the foregoing methods. , so the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be achieved.
- the processing unit 820 in FIG. 8 may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuitry.
- the transceiver unit 810 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
- Transceiver unit 810 may also be referred to as a communication unit or a communication interface.
- the storage unit may be implemented by a memory.
- the network device 800 may correspond to the terminal device of the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each unit in the terminal device 800 are respectively for implementing the corresponding steps of the foregoing methods. , so the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be achieved.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 900 includes a transceiving unit 910 and a processing unit 920, the transceiving unit 910 can communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 920 is used for data processing.
- Transceiver unit 910 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit.
- the communication apparatus 900 may further include a storage unit, where the storage unit may be used to store instructions or/or data, and the processing unit 920 may read the instructions or/or data in the storage unit.
- the communication apparatus 900 may be used to perform the actions performed by the network equipment in the above method embodiments.
- the communication apparatus 900 may be a network equipment or a component that can be configured in the network equipment, and the transceiver unit 910 is used to perform the above-mentioned actions.
- the processing unit 920 is configured to perform the operations related to the processing on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown above.
- the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the actions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 900 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 900 includes:
- the processing unit 920 is configured to determine first scheduling information, and the first scheduling information is used by the terminal device to determine whether the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; wherein the first scheduling information and the second scheduling of the second unit time unit The information is the same, and the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition; or, the first scheduling information is different from the second scheduling information in the second time unit, and the transmission on the first time unit does not satisfy the first condition;
- the second time unit is the time unit before the first time unit, the transmission direction on the first time unit and the second time unit is the same, and there is no transmission in the opposite direction between the second time unit and the first time unit,
- the first condition includes at least one of the same transmit power, the same precoding, the same antenna port, and the same frequency domain resource;
- the transmission on the first time unit satisfies the first condition, and the transmission on the first time unit is the same as the transmission on the second time unit;
- the transceiver unit 910 is configured to send the first scheduling information to the terminal device; the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to send downlink data to the terminal device in the first time unit and the second time unit; or, in the first time unit and the second time unit The uplink data sent by the terminal equipment is received in the time unit.
- the first scheduling information and the second scheduling information are carried in downlink control information DCI.
- the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to: send third scheduling information to the terminal device, where the third scheduling information is used to indicate that the sending device satisfies a second condition within the first duration, and the second condition includes one or more of the following: :
- the transmitting device does not turn off the power amplifier, the transmitting device does not perform carrier frequency switching, or the transmitting device does not perform antenna switching.
- the second condition is valid within the first duration, and the first duration is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the first duration is predefined.
- the transceiver unit 910 when the transceiver unit 910 sends downlink data, the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to: receive capability information sent by the terminal device, where the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device can support joint channel estimation for multiple time units.
- the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the actions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 900 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 900 includes:
- the processing unit 920 is configured to determine first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units between the third time unit and the fourth time unit, the third time unit belongs to multiple time units, and the fourth time unit is multiple.
- a time unit that has the same number of DMRS configurations as the third time unit and has the closest interval among the time units, wherein at least one fifth time unit is included between the third time unit and the fourth time unit.
- the DMRS configuration quantity is less than the DMRS configuration quantity on the third time unit; the transceiver unit 910 is configured to send the first indication information to the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the number of time units of the multiple time units is K, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data blocks; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks on the K time units; or,
- the K time units include multiple data blocks, and the multiple data blocks are partially identical and partially different, and the second indication information is used to determine the number of the K time units.
- the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to: receive first capability information sent by the terminal device, where the first capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device can support at most M times. Joint channel estimation of units, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
- K is less than or equal to M.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the multiple time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling.
- the configuration information of the number of DMRSs includes any one of configuration information of the additional number of DMRSs, configuration information of the total number of DMRSs, configuration information of the variation of the additional number of DMRSs, or configuration information of the variation of the total number of DMRSs.
- the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the actions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 900 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 900 includes:
- the processing unit 920 is configured to determine first downlink control information DCI, where the first DCI is used to indicate a first DMRS configuration pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern belongs to a DMRS configuration pattern set, and the DMRS configuration pattern set includes at least two different DMRS configurations pattern, the first DMRS configuration pattern is used to determine the number of DMRS configurations on K time units, where the number of DMRS configurations on at least two time units in the K time units is different, where K is a positive value greater than or equal to 2 Integer; the transceiver unit 910 is configured to send the first DCI to the terminal device.
- K is predefined, or K is indicated by the network device through additional indication information, or K is determined by the number of value contents in the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are the same, and the additional indication information is used to determine the number of repeated transmissions of the data blocks; or,
- the data blocks transmitted on each of the K time units are not identical, and the additional indication information is used to determine the number of different data blocks in the K time units.
- the DMRS configuration pattern set is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling or is a predefined configuration pattern set.
- the first DCI is used to indicate the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to: send the media access control layer control to the terminal device.
- Unit MAC CE signaling, MAC CE signaling is used to activate the terminal device to determine the first DMRS configuration pattern from the set of DMRS configuration patterns according to the index value of the first DMRS configuration pattern.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling; or,
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the K time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the first DMRS configuration pattern includes any one of a configuration pattern of an additional number of DMRSs, a configuration pattern of a total number of DMRSs, a change amount configuration pattern of the additional DMRS number, or a configuration pattern of a change amount of the total number of DMRSs.
- the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the actions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 900 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 900 includes:
- the processing unit 920 is configured to determine first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the same transmission power is used on K time units or joint channel estimation is performed on K time units, and each of the K time units A maximum of one additional demodulation reference signal DMRS is configured on the time unit, where K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; the transceiver unit 910 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device.
- K is greater than a first threshold value, and the first threshold value is predefined; or, the first threshold value is indicated by the communication device through the second information; optionally, the first message and the second message may be It is carried in the same signaling, or it can be carried in different signaling.
- the first information may be carried in DCI or RRC signaling.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the K time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than K.
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by RRC signaling; or,
- the initial time domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the K time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the actions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 above.
- each module in the communication apparatus 900 may be implemented by software.
- the terminal device 900 includes:
- the processing unit 920 is configured to determine third indication information, where the third indication information includes N values, the N values are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value in the N values is used to indicate N Quantity information of the demodulation reference signal DMRS on the i-th time unit in the time units, where i and N are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ N; the transceiver unit 910 is configured to send a third indication to the terminal device information.
- the third indication information includes N groups of bits, the N groups of bits are in one-to-one correspondence with the N time units, and the i-th value in the N values corresponds to the i-th group of bits in the N groups of bits.
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 1, and the i-th value is determined by 2 bits; or,
- the number of time domain symbols occupied by the pre-DMRS is 2, and the i-th value is determined by 1 bit.
- the third indication information may be carried in radio resource control RRC signaling or downlink control information DCI.
- the quantity information of DMRSs includes any one of the following information types: the quantity of additional DMRSs, the total quantity of DMRSs, the variation of the quantity of additional DMRSs, the variation of the total quantity of DMRSs, wherein the total quantity of DMRSs is the additional quantity of DMRSs.
- the third indication information is carried in the DCI, and the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the type of the quantity information of the DMRS.
- the third indication information is carried in the RRC signaling, and the type of the DMRS quantity information is predefined. type.
- the i-th value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the i-th time unit
- the transceiver unit 910 is further configured to send fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the i-th time unit.
- No pre-DMRS is configured on the time unit.
- the ith value is used to indicate the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit
- the transceiver unit 910 is also used to send fifth indication information to the terminal device, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the th Whether pre-DMRS is configured on i time units.
- the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit, where the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit; or ,
- the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit, where the ith value is used to indicate the total number of DMRSs on the ith time unit; or,
- the third indication information and RRC signaling are used to instruct the terminal device to determine the amount of change in the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit, where the ith value is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs on the ith time unit , the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time; or,
- the third indication information and RRC signaling are used to instruct the terminal device to determine the variation of the total number of DMRSs in the i-th time unit, where the i-th value is used to indicate the total number of DMRSs in the i-th time unit , the RRC signaling is used to indicate the number of additional DMRSs at the i-th time.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is the centered time-domain symbol on the j-th time unit
- the j-th time-domain symbol is The number of time units is any one of the N time units except the first and last two time units, where j is a positive integer greater than 1 and less than N.
- the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is configured by radio resource control RRC signaling; or, the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the pre-DMRS is predefined.
- the time unit in the N time units is any one of the following: a time slot, a subslot, a frame, a subframe, or a time domain resource occupied by one data block transmission.
- the processing unit 920 in FIG. 9 may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuitry.
- the transceiver unit 910 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
- Transceiver unit 910 may also be referred to as a communication unit or a communication interface.
- the storage unit may be implemented by a memory.
- the network device 900 may correspond to the network device of the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 900 are respectively to implement the corresponding steps of the foregoing methods. , so the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be achieved.
- an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus 1000 .
- the communication device 1000 includes a processor 1010, the processor 1010 is coupled with a memory 1020, the memory 1020 is used for storing computer programs or instructions or/or data, and the processor 1010 is used for executing the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1020. , so that the methods in the above method embodiments are executed.
- the communication apparatus 1000 includes one or more processors 1010 .
- the communication apparatus 1000 may further include a memory 1020 .
- the communication device 1000 may include one or more memories 1020 .
- the memory 1020 may be integrated with the processor 1010, or provided separately.
- the communication apparatus 1000 may further include a transceiver 1030, and the transceiver 1030 is used for signal reception and/or transmission.
- the processor 1010 is configured to control the transceiver 1030 to receive and/or transmit signals.
- the communication apparatus 1000 is configured to implement the operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
- the processor 1010 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments
- the transceiver 1030 is configured to implement the above-mentioned method embodiments performed by the terminal device.
- the communication apparatus 1000 is configured to implement the operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
- the processor 1010 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiments
- the transceiver 1030 is configured to implement the transceiving-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
- the terminal device takes a mobile phone as an example.
- the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
- the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
- the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
- the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
- Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
- the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
- the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
- the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function may be regarded as a transceiver unit of the terminal device, and the processor with a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device.
- the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1110 and a processing unit 1120 .
- the transceiver unit 1110 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, or the like.
- the processing unit 1120 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
- the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1110 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 1110 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1110 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
- the transceiver unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
- the receiving unit may also sometimes be referred to as a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit, or the like.
- the transmitting unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
- the transceiver unit 1110 is configured to perform the receiving operation of the terminal device in FIG. 2 to FIG. 7 .
- the processing unit 1120 is configured to perform the processing actions on the terminal device side in FIG. 2 to FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 11 is only an example and not a limitation, and the above-mentioned terminal device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not depend on the structure shown in FIG. 11 .
- the chip When the communication device 1100 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
- the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface
- the processing unit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- This embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus 1200, where the communication apparatus 1200 may be a network device or a chip.
- the communication apparatus 1200 may be used to perform the operations performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
- FIG. 12 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of a base station.
- the base station includes part 1210 and part 1220.
- the 1212 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the 1220 part is mainly used for baseband processing and control of the base station.
- the 1210 part can generally be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver.
- the 1220 part is usually the control center of the base station, which may be generally referred to as a processing unit, and is used to control the base station to perform the processing operations on the network device side in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the transceiver unit of part 1210 which may also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., includes an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, where the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
- the device for implementing the receiving function in the part 1210 may be regarded as a receiving unit
- the device for implementing the transmitting function may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the part 1210 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
- the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, and the like
- the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, and the like.
- Section 1220 may include one or more single boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the processor is used to read and execute the program in the memory to realize the baseband processing function and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to enhance the processing capability.
- one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more memories may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards at the same time. device.
- the transceiver unit in part 1210 is used to perform the steps related to the transmission and reception performed by the network device in the embodiments shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 3 ; the part 1220 is used to perform the implementation shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 3 . Examples of processing-related steps performed by the network device.
- FIG. 12 is only an example and not a limitation, and the above-mentioned network device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not depend on the structure shown in FIG. 12 .
- the chip When the communication device 1200 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
- the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
- the processing unit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, on which computer instructions for implementing the method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments are stored.
- the computer when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
- Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product including instructions, which, when executed by a computer, cause the computer to implement the method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the network device and the terminal device in the above embodiments.
- the communication system includes: the network device and the terminal device in the embodiments described above in conjunction with FIG. 2 to FIG. 7 .
- the terminal device or the network device may include a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
- the hardware layer may include hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory).
- the operating system of the operating system layer may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
- the application layer may include applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
- the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program in which the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are recorded can be executed to execute the methods according to the embodiments of the present application.
- the execution body of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call a program and execute the program.
- Computer readable media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc. ), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, stick or key drives, etc.).
- magnetic storage devices eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.
- optical disks eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.
- smart cards and flash memory devices eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, stick or key drives, etc.
- Various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
- the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
- processors mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a CPU, and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASICs), off-the-shelf processors Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
- a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
- the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
- the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
- Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM).
- RAM can be used as an external cache.
- RAM may include the following forms: static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) , double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and Direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
- SRAM static random access memory
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
- ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
- Direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
- the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components
- the memory storage module
- memory described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
- the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
- the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
- the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
- the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
本申请提供了一种DMRS的配置方法, 该方法包括: 网络设备向终端设备发送第一调度信息, 终端设备根据第一调度信息确定第一时间单元的传输是否满足第一条件, 当第一时间单元对应的第一调度信息与第二时间单元对应的第二调度信息相同时, 第一时间单元上的传输与第二时间单元上的传输满足第一条件, 即保持相同的发送功率, 相同的预编码, 相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项。通过第一调度信息限制了时间单元上的传输, 使得终端设备或者网络设备在接收数据时才能够对满足第一条件且满足相位连续性的时间单元上的DMRS进行合并, 实现更准确的信道估计, 改善对上行传输数据的解调性能。
Description
本申请涉及无线通信领域,尤其涉及一种DMRS的配置方法及设备。
当前无线接入技术新空口(new radio access technology,NR)协议中定义了解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)用于信道估计。网络侧基于信道质量,给终端配置不同的DMRS来进行保证通信性能,DMRS和物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)上承载的数据进行相同的预编码,因此接收端能够基于DMRS估计出的信道状态信息,从而对PUSCH或者PDSCH上传输的数据进行解调。当信道较差时,网络设备可以配置较多的DMRS,提高信道估计的准确性。当信道较好时,网络设备可以配置较少的DMRS,从而减少DMRS的时频资源开销。
当前无线新接入(new radio,NR)技术中,DMRS的数量的确定是基于无线资源控制信令(Radio Resource Control,RRC)信令配置的,而RRC信令的更新较慢,在更新之前的时间内的多个发送采用相同的DMRS配置信息确定各个发送的DMRS的数量,无法灵活匹配不同发送的信道衰落的变化来动态调整DMRS配置的数目,导致信道估计能力较差。
发明内容
本申请提供一种DMRS的配置方法及设备,以实现DMRS数量与信道质量的灵活适配。
第一方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于所述终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;
所述终端设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,所述终端设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
该技术方案由终端设备执行,通过限制多个时间单元上的传输,使得多个时间单元满足联合的信道估计的要求,在第一时间单元上发送能够保持与第二时间单元上发送的相位 连续性,在接收数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对传输数据的解调性能。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一调度信息和所述第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
当判断当前的时间单元上的传输是否和之前的时间单元上的传输满足一定的限制条件时,将起到该功能的调度信息直接承载于基站调度的每个时间单元对应的DCI中,具体的可以复用DCI的冗余字段或者新增的字段,不仅可以减少时延,还具有较高的兼容性。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示所述终端设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
本技术方案中,发送设备可以理解为发送数据的设备,即为网路设备或者终端设备的任意一种,第一持续时间可以理解为一个时间段、第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间存在不传输任何数据的时域符号或者周期性的时间段。第三调度信息可以用来限制终端设备发送上行数据时或者网络设备发送下行数据时,在第一持续时间内要满足第二条件,即终端设备或者网络设备不在第一持续时间内关闭功率放大器、切换载频、或者切换天线,满足第二条件的时间单元可以做联合信道估计。
通过第三调度信息,进一步限制了上行数据或者下行数据的发送,提高了联合信道估计的可能性,进一步提高了信道估计的准确性。
本技术方案中的第三调度信息可以为与第一调度信息不同的调度信息,也可以为与第一调度信息相同的调度信息,即若第一调度信息指示了第一时间单元满足了第一条件,则默认针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续的情况,也需要同时满足第二条件。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
本技术方案中,第一持续时间内可以限制下行数据或上行数据的发送,如果时间超过了第一限制时间,则网络设备或者终端设备的数据发送则不受第二条件的限制。
本技术方案中,网络设备可以通过RRC信令配置了一个第一持续时间,第一持续时间的取值可以为几个时隙、几毫秒或者几个时域符号等,该第一持续时间的取值用来确定第二条件的有效限制时间;或者,该第一持续时间为预定义的,此时即不需要网络设备单独配置和发送第三调度信息,减少了网络设备的信令开销。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述终端设备接收下行数据前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备上报能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
本技术方案中,能力信息的可以为1比特的指示信息,网络设备配置的1个参数或者多个比特的指示信息。
能力信息为1比特的指示信息,其中1比特的取值来告知网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计,比如取1时满足取0时不满足;
能力信息为终端设备配置的1个参数,该1个参数包含多个比特。该参数的不同取值用于指示终端设备可以最多支持联合信道估计的不同时间单元数量。该1个参数的取值可以直接指示出终端设备支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,也即该1个参数的取值和终端设备最多支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量相同。例如,能力信息的取值为6,指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值也可以根据预定义的关系对应一个时间单元的数量。例如,预定义的关系为该1个参数的取值为终端设备最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量的二分之一,例如,能力信息的取值为3,指示终端设备做多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。
能力信息包括多个比特的指示信息,该多个比特分包含第一比特部分和第二比特部分。其中,第一比特的取值指示网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。第二比特部分的取值指示终端设备可以最多支持多少个时间单元的联合信道估计。本技术方案通过终端设备主动上报能力信息的方式,告知网络终端设备是否可以对多个时间单元进行联合的信道估计,提高了网络设备对下行数据发送的限制效率。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元包含的时间单元数量可以相同或者不同。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第二方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;根据所述第一指示信息,所述终端设备确定所述多个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量。
该技术方案由终端设备执行,通过第一指示信息确定可配置较多的DMRS的时间单元之间的间隔,中间的时间单元上配置较少的DMRS,可以减少多个时间单元上DMRS的总开销,有助于改善系统的频谱效率。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;
所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
本技术方案中,当多个时间单元中每个时间单元上传输的数据块不完全相同时,可以通过第二指示信息的取值确定联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元数数量;当多个时间单元上传输相同的数据块时,第二指示信息用于指示是否开启K个时间单元的联合信道估计的功能,重复传输的次数由RRC信令配置。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息指示的所述第三时间单元和所述第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量大于所述第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,所述K个时间单元上采用“前密后疏”的DMRS配置。
本技术方案中,第三时间单元为第二指示信息确定的K个时间单元中的首个时间单元,第四时间单元不在K个时间单元当中。此时第三时间单元上配置较多的时间单元,其余的时间单元配置较少的DMRS数量。中间时间单元上的上DMRS的数量小于第三时间单元上配置的DMRS数量。
本技术方能够利用集中到一个时间单元上的多个DMRS进行快速而准确的信道估计,不但减少了时延而且提高了解调数据的效率。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述终端设备接收所述多个时间单元上的数据前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备上报第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
本技术方案中,第一能力信息的指示可以为1比特的指示信息,网络设备配置的1个参数或者多个比特的指示信息。
能力信息为1比特的指示信息,其中1比特的取值来告知网络设备终端设备能否支持K个时间单元的联合信道估计,比如取1时满足取0时不满足;
能力信息为终端设备配置的1个参数,该1个参数包含多个比特。该参数的不同取值用于指示终端设备可以最多支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值可以直接指示出终端设备支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,也即该1个参数的取值和终端设备最多支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量相同。例如,能力信息的取值为6,指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值也可以根据预定义的关系对应一个时间单元的数量。例如,预定义的关系为该1个参数的取值为终端设备最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量的二分之一,例如,能力信息的取值为3,指示终端设备做多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。
能力信息包括多个比特的指示信息,该多个比特分包含第一比特部分和第二比特部分。其中,第一比特的取值指示网络设备终端设备能否支持对K个时间单元的联合信道估计。第二比特部分的取值指示终端设备可以最多支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计。
本技术方案通过终端设备主动上报第一能力信息的方式,告知网络终端设备是否可以对K个时间单元进行联合的信道估计,提高了数据传输的效率。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,K小于或等于M。
本技术方案中,通过网络设备指示的K值小于终端设备可支持的最多时间单元的数值M时,终端设备才能接收对K个时间单元上发送的DMRS,并对K个时间单元进行联合信道估计。
应理解,终端设备不期望网络设备下发的指示信息中指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量小于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量。当网络设备下发的指示信息中指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量大于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量,终端设备执行联合信道估计的相关操采取“截断处理”或者“滑动处理”,具体操作方式可参见下文的说明,这里不再赘述。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第三方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样;根据所述第一DMRS配置图样,所述终端设备确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
该技术方案由终端设备执行,终端设备通过第一DCI从包含多种不同的DMRS配置图样的集合集合中确定第一DMRS配置图样,且该DMRS配置图样中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,不仅实现了DMRS配置图样的动态灵活调度,减少了时延,而且也提高了信道质量与DMRS数量的适配性。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述K为预定义的,或者所述K为所述网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者由所述第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的。
在本技术方案中,K的取值灵活多样。如若为预定义的,可以减少一定的信令开销;也可以为网络设备通过额外的指示信息确定,当多个时间单元上传输相同的传输块时,额外的指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数或者当多个时间单元传输不完全相同的传输块时,该指示信息用于确定不同数据块的数量。不完全相同可以理解为多个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,也可以理解为多个时间上传输的数据块部分相同,且其余部分不同;还可以是通过第一DMRS图样中对应的dmrs-AdditionalPosition的数量来确定。例如当第一DMRS配置图样的取值内容为{Pos2,Pos0,Pos2,Pos0},即包含有4个取值,则隐含的指示对K=4个时间单元进行联合的DMRS配置,即第1-4个时间单元最多允许配置的附加DMRS个数分别为2,0,2,0个。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,附加DMRS配置图样集合中,maxLength只能有1个取值,即每个时间单元上的前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量是相同的;当然,附加DMRS配置图样集合,maxLength可以有两个取值,即每一种配置方案中每个时间单元上前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量不同。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的所述第一DCI之前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
本技术方案中,若网络设备未向终端设备发送触发信令MAC CE信令,即无MAC CE信令去激活终端设备根据第一DCI去确定第一DMRS图样,终端设备依然按照RRC信令配置的参数dmrs-additional Position、max Length等参数的取值来配置每个时间单元的DMRS,并进行上行发送或者下行的接收。
本技术方案中,通过第一DCI的索引值确定第一DMRS图样,减少了时延,实现了DMRS配置图样的动态灵活调度,减少了时延,而且也提高了信道质量与DMRS数量的适配性。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合还可以包括附加DMRS数量配置集合、附加DMRS的数量的变化量配置集合、DMRS总数量配置集合、DMRS的总数量的变化量配置集合中的任意一种。
第四方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计;根据所述第一信息,所述终端设备确定所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
本技术方案由终端设备执行,通过第一信息确定K个是时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者K个时间单元的联合信道估计,而且K个间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,可以实现更准确的信道估计,改善对传输数据的解调性能,减少了DMRS的总开销。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,K大于第一门限值;
所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指 示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
本技术方案中,网络设备还配置了第一门限值,当K个时间单元做联合信道估计时,当K大于或等于第一门限值时,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量最多配置1个,即附加DMRS的候选取值只能为{0,1}。因为联合信道估计时,相比单个时间单元的DMRS数量,已经有更多的DMRS可以用,不需要每个时间单元再配置2个或3个附加DMRS,减少了DMRS的开销。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一门限值的可能取值可以为2,4,8等,第一门限值大于等于2。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第五方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:
终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;根据所述第三指示信息,所述终端设备确定所述N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量。
本技术方案由终端设备执行,通过第三指示信息配置了K个时间单元的DMRS数量信息,实现了K个时间单元上的联合而灵活的DMRS数量配置。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
本技术方案中,一个时间单元上DMRS占据的时域符号位置最多为4个,因此当前置占据一个时域符号时,附加DMRS也占据一个时域符号,即一个时间单元上最多可配置4个DMRS,通过2比特的取值可以确定其数量信息;当前置占据两个时域符号时,附加DMRS也占据两个时域符号,即一个时间单元上最多可配置2个DMRS,通过1比特的取值可以确定其数量信息。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资 源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,第三指示信息包括N个取值,分别为{Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,…,Pos sN},每一个取值对应于N个时间单元中每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的位置,Pos si的取值与N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量信息相对应。网络设备或者终端设备可以通过第三指示信息灵活配置N个时间单元上的DMRS数量。在联合信道估计中,一方面能够保证足够的信道估计准确性,另一方面能够保证较低的DMRS总开销,有助于改善传输的效率和性能。
当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,第三指示信息包括N组比特,N组比特与N个时间单元一一对应,N个取值中的第i个取值对应于N组比特中的第i组比特,即第i个取值通过第i组比特确定。网络设备或者终端设备可以通过DCI上承载的第三指示信息指示N个时间单元上的DMRS数量配置,实现了DMRS配置数量的动态调整,且减少了时延。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,此时DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类,本申请实施例并不对其指示方式作具体限定。若网络设备未向终端设备发送该信息,或者该指示信息的取值为缺省时,此时默认第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,此时DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
结合第五方面,第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
本技术方案中,若网络设备未向终端设备发送第四指示信息,或者第四指示信息的取值为缺省时,则默认第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS。
结合第五方面,第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
结合第五方面,第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于DCI中时:
第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量,即DCI覆盖了原来RRC信令配置的附加DMRS数量的取值,实现了K个时间单元上DMRS数量的动态调整。
当所述第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量的变化量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量的变化量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息,结合原来RRC信令中配置的附加DMRS数量的取值进行代数计算,以配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量。
结合第五方面,第五方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第五方面,第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第六方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:
网络设备确定第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一调度消息;
所述网络设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上向所述终端设备发送下行数据;或者,所述网络设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收所述终端设备发送的上行数据。
该技术方案由网络设备执行,通过限制多个时间单元上的数据传输,使得多个时间单元满足联合的信道估计的要求,在第一时间单元上数据的发送能够保持与第二时间单元上发送的相位连续性,在接收数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对传输数据的解调性能。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一调度信息和所述第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
当判断当前的时间单元上的传输是否和之前的时间单元上的传输满足一定的限制条件时,将起到该功能的调度信息直接承载于基站调度的每个时间单元对应的DCI中,具体的可以复用DCI的冗余字段或者新增的字段,不仅可以减少时延,还具有较高的兼容性。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
本技术方案中,发送设备指的是发送数据的设备,即为网络设备或者终端设备中的其中一个。第一持续时间可以理解为一个时间段、第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间存在不传输任何数据的时域符号或者周期性的时间段。第三调度信息可以用来限制终端设备发送上行数据时或者网络设备发送下行数据时,在第一持续时间内要满足第二条件,即终端设备或者网络设备不在第一持续时间内关闭功率放大器、切换载频、或者切换天线,满足第二条件的时间单元可以做联合信道估计。
通过第三调度信息,进一步限制了上行数据或者下行数据的发送,提高了联合信道估计的可能性,进一步提高了信道估计的准确性。
本技术方案中的第三调度信息可以为与第一调度信息不同的调度信息;也可以为与第一调度信息相同的调度信息,即若第一调度信息指示了第一时间单元满足了第一条件,则默认针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续的情况,也需要同时满足第二条件。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
本技术方案中,第一持续时间内可以限制下行数据或上行数据的发送,如果时间超过了第一限制时间,则网络设备或者终端设备的数据发送则不受第二条件的限制。
本技术方案中,网络设备可以通过RRC信令配置了一个第一持续时间,第一持续时间的取值可以为几个时隙、几毫秒或者几个时域符号等,该第一持续时间的取值用来确定第二条件的有效限制时间;或者,该第一持续时间为预定义的,此时即不需要网络设备单独配置和发送第三调度信息,减少了网络设备的信令开销。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述网络设备发送下行数据前,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
本技术方案中,能力信息可以是一个字段,该字段包含一个或者多个比特,该字段的不同状态值或者不同取值指示不同的能力信息:
能力信息为1比特的指示信息,网络设备配置的1个参数或者多个比特的指示信息。其中1比特的取值来告知网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计,比如取1时满足取0时不满足;
能力信息为终端设备配置的1个参数,该1个参数包含多个比特。该参数的不同取值用于指示终端设备可以最多支持联合信道估计的不同时间单元数量。该1个参数的取值可以直接指示出终端设备支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,也即该1个参数的取值和终端设备最多支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量相同。例如,能力信息的取值为6,指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值也可以根据预定义的关系对应一个时间单元的数量。例如,预定义的关系为该1个参数的取值为终端设备最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量的二分之一,例如,能力信息的取值为3,指示终端设备做多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。
能力信息包括多个比特的指示信息,该多个比特分包含第一比特部分和第二比特部分。其中,第一比特的取值指示网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。第二比特部分的取值指示终端设备可以最多支持多少个时间单元的联合信道估计。本技术方案通过终端设备主动上报能力信息的方式,告知网络终端设备是否可以对多个时间单元进行联合的信道估计,提高了网络设备对下行数据发送的限制效率。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元包含的时间单元数量可以相同或者不同。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第七方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:
网络设备确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;
所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
该技术方案由网络设备执行,通过第一指示信息确定可配置较多的DMRS的时间单元之间的间隔,中间的时间单元上配置较少的DMRS,可以减少多个时间单元上DMRS的总开销,有助于改善系统的频谱效率。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;;
其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息 用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。本技术方案中,当多个时间单元中每个时间单元上传输的数据块不完全相同时,可以通过第二指示信息的取值确定联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元数量;当多个时间单元上传输相同的数据块时,第二指示信息用于指示是否开启K个时间单元的联合信道估计的功能,重复传输的次数由RRC信令配置。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息指示的所述第三时间单元和所述第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量大于所述第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,所述K个时间单元上采用“前密后疏”的DMRS配置。
本技术方案中,第三时间单元为第二指示信息确定的K个时间单元中的首个时间单元,第四时间单元不在K个时间单元当中。此时第三时间单元上配置较多的时间单元,其余的时间单元配置较少的DMRS数量。中间时间单元上的上DMRS的数量小于第三时间单元上配置的DMRS数量。本技术方能够利用集中到一个时间单元上的多个DMRS进行快速而准确的信道估计,不但减少了时延而且提高了解调数据的效率。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述网络设备在所述多个时间单元上发送下行数据前,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
本技术方案中,能力信息可以是一个字段,该字段包含一个或者多个比特,该字段的不同状态值或者不同取值指示不同的能力信息,具体的的指示包括以下几种可能的方式:
能力信息为1比特的指示信息,1比特的取值来告知网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元时间单元的联合信道估计。例如,1比特的取值为1时,终端设备能满足对多个时间单元的联合信道估计;1比特的取值为0时,终端设备不能支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计;
能力信息为终端设备配置的1个参数,该1个参数包含多个比特。该参数的不同取值用于指示终端设备可以最多支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值可以直接指示出终端设备支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,也即该1个参数的取值和终端设备最多支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量相同。例如,能力信息的取值为6,指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值也可以根据预定义的关系对应一个时间单元的数量。例如,预定义的关系为该1个参数的取值为终端设备最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量的二分之一,例如,能力信息的取值为3,指示终端设备做多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。
能力信息包括多个比特的指示信息,该多个比特分包含第一比特部分和第二比特部分。其中,第一比特的取值指示网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。第二比特部分的取值指示终端设备可以最多支持多少个时间单元的联合信道估计。
本技术方案通过终端设备主动上报第一能力信息的方式,告知网络终端设备是否可以对K个时间单元进行联合的信道估计,提高了数据传输的效率。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,K小于或等于M。
本技术方案中,通过网络设备指示的K值小于终端设备可支持的最多时间单元的数值M时,终端设备才能接收对K个时间单元上发送的DMRS,并对K个时间单元进行联合信道估计。
应理解,终端设备不期望网络设备下发的指示信息中指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量小于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量。当网络设备下发的指示信息中指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量大于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量,终端设备执行联合信道估计的相关操作时,采取“截断处理”或者“滑动处理”,具体操作方式可参见下文说明,这里不再赘述。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第八方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:
网络设备确定第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样用于确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数;所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第一DCI。
该技术方案由终端设备执行,终端设备通过第一DCI从包含多种不同的DMRS配置图样的集合集合中确定第一DMRS配置图样,且该DMRS配置图样中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,不仅实现了DMRS配置图样的动态灵活调度,减少了时延,而且也提高了信道质量与DMRS数量的适配性。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述K为预定义的,或者所述K为所述网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者由所述第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的。
在本技术方案中,K的取值灵活多样。如若为预定义的,可以减少一定的信令开销;也可以为网络设备通过额外的指示信息确定,当多个时间单元上传输相同的传输块时,额外的指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数或者当多个时间单元传输不同的传输块时,该指示信息用于确定不同数据块的数量;还可以是通过第一DMRS图样中对应的dmrs-AdditionalPosition的数量来确定。例如当第一DMRS配置图样的取值内容为{Pos2, Pos0,Pos2,Pos0},即包含有4个取值,则隐含的指示对K=4个时间单元进行联合的DMRS配置,即第1-4个时间单元最多允许配置的附加DMRS个数分别为2,0,2,0个。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,附加DMRS配置图样集合中,maxLength只能有1个取值,即每个时间单元上的前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量是相同的;当然,附加DMRS配置图样集合,maxLength可以有两个取值,即每一种配置方案中每个时间单元上前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量不同。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第一DCI之前,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
本技术方案中,若网络设备未向终端设备发送触发信令MAC CE信令,即无MAC CE信令去激活终端设备根据第一DCI去确定第一DMRS图样,终端设备依然按照RRC信令配置的参数dmrs-additional Position、max Length等参数的取值来配置每个时间单元的DMRS,并进行上行发送或者下行的接收。
本技术方案中,通过第一DCI的索引值确定第一DMRS图样,减少了时延,实现了DMRS配置图样的动态灵活调度,减少了时延,而且也提高了信道质量与DMRS数量的适配性。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合还可以包括附加DMRS数量配置集合、附加DMRS的数量的变化量配置集合、DMRS总数量配置集合、DMRS的总数量的变化量配置集合中的任意一种。
第九方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:
网络设备确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数;所述网络设备 向终端设备发送所述第一信息。
本技术方案由网络设备执行,通过第一信息确定K个是时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者K个时间单元的联合信道估计,而且K个间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,可以实现更准确的信道估计,改善对传输数据的解调性能,减少了DMRS的总开销。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,K大于第一门限值;
所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
本技术方案中,网络设备还配置了第一门限值,当K个时间单元做联合信道估计时,当K大于或等于第一门限值时,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量最多配置1个,即附加DMRS的候选取值只能为{0,1}。因为联合信道估计时,相比单个时间单元的DMRS数量,已经有更多的DMRS可以用,不需要每个时间单元再配置2个或3个附加DMRS,减少了DMRS的开销。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,第一门限值的可能取值可以为2,4,8等,第一门限值大于等于2。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十方面,提供了一种DMRS的配置方法,所述方法包括:
网络设备确定第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,1≤i≤N,i和N为自然数;
所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第三指示信息。
本技术方案由网络设备执行,通过第三指示信息配置了K个时间单元的DMRS数量信息,实现了K个时间单元山的联合而灵活的DMRS数量配置。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
本技术方案中,一个时间单元上DMRS占据的时域符号位置最多为4个,因此当前置占据一个时域符号时,附加DMRS也占据一个时域符号,即一个时间单元上最多可配置4个DMRS,通过2比特的取值可以确定其数量信息;当前置占据两个时域符号时,附加DMRS也占据两个时域符号,即一个时间单元上最多可配置2个DMRS,通过1比特的取值可以确定其数量信息。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,第三指示信息包括N个取值,分别为{Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,…,Pos sN},每一个取值对应于N个时间单元中每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的位置,Pos si的取值与N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量信息相对应。网络设备或者终端设备可以通过第三指示信息灵活配置N个时间单元上的DMRS数量。在联合信道估计中,一方面能够保证足够的信道估计准确性,另一方面能够保证较低的DMRS总开销,有助于改善传输的效率和性能。
当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,第三指示信息包括N组比特,N组比特与N个时间单元一一对应,N个取值中的第i个取值对应于N组比特中的第i组比特,即第i个取值通过第i组比特确定。网络设备或者终端设备可以通过DCI上承载的第三指示信息指示N个时间单元上的DMRS数量配置,实现了DMRS配置数量的动态调整,且减少了时延。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,此时DMRS的数量信息的类型由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类,本申请实施例并不对其指示方式作具体限定。若网络设备未向终端设备发送该信息,或者该指示信息的取值为缺省时,此时默认第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,此时DMRS的数量信息的类型由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
本技术方案中,若网络设备未向终端设备发送第四指示信息,或者第四指示信息的取值为缺省时,则默认第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第 i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息和RRC信令指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息和RRC信令指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量;其中,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
本技术方案中,当第三指示信息承载于DCI中时:
第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量,即DCI覆盖了原来RRC信令配置的附加DMRS数量的取值,实现了K个时间单元上DMRS数量的动态调整。
当所述第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量的变化量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量的变化量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息,结合原来RRC信令中配置的附加DMRS数量的取值进行代数计算,以配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
本技术方案中,“居中的”时域符号指的第j个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号。通过保证DMRS处于某个时间单元的中间部分,有助于提高系统的频谱效率和信道估计的准确性。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十一方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
处理单元,用于确定所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息是否相同,其中,所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所 述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
若所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;
所述收发单元还用于,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一调度信息和所述第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于:
接收网络设备发送的第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元接收下行数据前,所述收发单元还用于:
向所述网络设备上报能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述通信装置能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元包含的时间单元数量可以相同或者不同。
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十二方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述多个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于:
接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;
其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,
所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,
所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息指示的所述第三时间单元和所述第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量大于所述第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,所述K个时间单元上采用“前密后疏”的DMRS配置。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元接收所述多个时间单元上的数据前,所述收发单元还用于:
向所述网络设备上报第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述通信装置最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,K小于或等于M。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些实现方式中,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样;处理单元,用于根据所述第一DCI确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述K为预定义的,或者所述K为所述网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者由所述第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,附加DMRS配置图样集合中,maxLength只能有1个取值,即每个时间单元上的前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量是相同的;当然,附加DMRS配置图样集合,maxLength可以有两个取值,即每一种配置方案中每个时间单元上前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量不同。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述收发单元接收所述网络设备发送的所述第一DCI之前, 所述收发单元用于:接收所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述通信装置根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
结合第十三方面,在第十三方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合还可以包括附加DMRS数量配置集合、附加DMRS的数量的变化量配置集合、DMRS总数量配置集合、DMRS的总数量的变化量配置集合中的任意一种。
第十四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计;处理单元,用于根据所述第一信息确定所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,K大于第一门限值;
所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指示的;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一门限值的可能取值可以为2,4,8等,第一门限值大于等于2。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十四方面,在第十四方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,1≤i≤N,i和N 为自然数;处理单元,用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量信息。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于接收网络设发送的配置信息,配置信息用于确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述网络设备发送的第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中,
所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十五方面,在第十五方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种: 时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
处理单元,用于确定第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;其中,
所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
所述第一时间单元上的数据满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;
收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一调度信息;
所述收发单元还用于,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上向所述终端设备发送下行数据;或者,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收所述终端设备发送的上行数据。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一调度信息和所述第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于:
向所述终端设备发送第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元发送下行数据前,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述终端设备发送的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元包含的时间单元数量可以相同或者不同。
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
处理单元,用于确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第 五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于:
向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;
所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,
所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息指示的所述第三时间单元和所述第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量大于所述第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,所述K个时间单元上采用“前密后疏”的DMRS配置。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元在所述多个时间单元上发送下行数据前,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述终端设备发送的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,K小于或等于M。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十七方面,在第十七方面的某些实现方式中,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
处理单元,用于确定第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样用于确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第一DCI。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,所述K为预定义的,或者所述K为通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者由所述第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述收发单元用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一DCI之前,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十八方面,在第十八方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第十九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
处理单元,用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第一信息。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,K大于第一门限值;所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述通信装置通过第二信息指示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一门限值的可能取值可以为2,4,8等,第一门限值大于等于2。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第十九方面,在第十九方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第二十方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:
处理单元,用于确定第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,1≤i≤N,i和N为自然数;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第三指示信息。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于,向所述终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,
所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
所述第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
所述第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,当所述K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,所述第j个时间单元为所述K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置或为预定义的。
结合第二十方面,在第二十方面的某些实现方式中,所述时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
第二十一方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行存储器中的所述计算机程序或指 令,使得第一方面至第十方面或第一方面至第十方面中任意一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法被执行。
第二十二方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令用于实现第一方面至第十方面或第一方面至第十方面中任意一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十二方面,提供了一种芯片系统,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行第一方面至第十方面或第一方面至第十方面中任意一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十三方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二十方面以及第一方面至第二十方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十四方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。
图1是本申请实施例的应用场景;
图2是本申请实施例的通信过程示意图;
图3是本申请实施例的通信过程又一示意图;
图4是本申请实施例的一种DMRS的资源图样的示意图;
图5是本申请实施例的通信过程又一示意图;
图6是本申请实施例的通信过程又一示意图;
图7是本申请实施例的通信过程又一示意图;
图8是本申请实施例通信装置的示意性框图;
图9是本申请实施例通信装置的又一示意性框图;
图10时本申请实施例通信装置的又一示意性框图;
图11是本申请实施例的终端设备的示意性框图;
图12是本申请实施例的网络设备的示意性框图。
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation,5G)系统或新一代无线接入技术(new radio access technology,NR)等。
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。 图1是适用于本申请实施例的发送和接收参考信号的方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100可以包括网络设备110和终端设备120,可选地,该通信系统还可以包括终端设备130。
应理解,该网络设备110可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备或可设置于该设备的芯片,该设备包括但不限于:基站(例如,基站NodeB、演进型基站eNodeB、第五代(5G)通信系统中的网络设备(如传输点(transmission point,TP)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、基站、小基站设备等)、未来通信系统中的网络设备、无线保真(Wireless-Fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入节点、无线中继节点、无线回传节点等。
网络设备110可以与多个终端设备(例如图中所示的终端设备120-130)通信。
应理解,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不作具体限定。本申请中将前述终端设备及可设置于前述终端设备的芯片统称为终端设备。
此外,该通信系统100也可以是公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)网络、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络或者其他网络。图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,该通信系统100中还可以包括其他网络设备和终端设备,图1中未予以画出。
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面简单介绍网络设备如何通过无线资源控制(Radio ResourceControl,RRC)信令配置附加DMRS数量。
为了确保接收端能够准确估计PUSCH或者PDSCH信道,并正确解调上行数据或者下行数据,为了适配多种信道衰落特性,例如不同的时变特性,即信道衰落在时间上变化的快与慢。当前NR协议配置了不同的DMRS时频资源图样(DMRS Pattern),当前NR协议配置的DMRS包括前置DMRS(front-loaded DMRS)和附加DMRS(additional DMRS)。当前NR协议依据DMRS在频域和时域的分布,定义了表1中的DMRS Pattern相关字段的取值,并通过RRC信令通知给UE。
表1Dmrs Pattern的相关字段(RRC信令通知)
应理解,表1给出了RRC信令配置的三种字段的可能取值,在实际情况中,RRC信令每次配置字段参数时,每一种字段只可能为一种取值,比如,dmrs-type为type2,max Length为len2,dmrs-Additional Position为pos3。
其中,字段dmrs-type确定前置DMRS在频域上的图样:
当dmrs-type配置为type1时,频域上每个物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)有两组码分复用(code division multiplexing,CDM),每组CDM的6个子载波通过正交覆盖码(orthogonal cover code,OCC)能支持2个流(layer)的传输,因此type1时,单个时域符号上能支持4个layer。
当dmrs-type配置为type2,频域上每个PRB有三组CDM,每组CDM的4个子载波通过OCC能支持2个layer,因此type2时单个时域符号上能最多能支持6个layer。
其中,参数max Length确定前置DMRS在时域上占用的符号数量:
当max Length配置为len1时,前置DMRS只占用一个时域符号;
当max Length配置为len2时,前置DMRS可以占用一个时域符号,也可以占用两个符号,具体占用几个时域符号,需要通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)单独指示。因此通过在两个时域符号之间采用时域正交覆盖码(orthogonal cover code,OCC),能支持多一倍UE的复用。
例如:type-1,max Length=len 1时,最多能支持8个layer的传输;type2,max Length=len2时,最多能支持12个layer的传输。
其中,字段dmrs-Additional Position确定在一个传输时间间隔(transmission time interval,TTI)内最多能够配置的附加DMRS的数量数量:
当字段dmrs-Additional Position配置为Pos0时,不能配置附加DMRS;
当字段dmrs-Additional Position配置为Pos1时,最多配置1个附加DMRS;
当字段dmrs-Additional Position配置为Pos2时,最多配置2个附加DMRS;
当字段dmrs-Additional Position配置为Pos3时,最多配置3个附加DMRS。
当前NR协议中,每个附加DMRS占用的时域符号的数量与前置DMRS占用的时域符号的数量相同。当前置DMRS占用1个时域符号时,如有配置附加DMRS,每个附加DMRS也占用1个时域符号;当前置DMRS占用两个连续的时域符号时,如果有配置附加DMRS,每个additional DMRS也占用两个连续的时域符号。
当字段max Length=len1时,此时DCI指示与RRC信令一致,即前置DMRS只占用1个时域符号,附加DMRS最多可以配置3个;
当字段max Length=len2时,此时无论DCI指示前置DMRS占据1个时域符号还是两个时域符号,附加DMRS最多可以配置1个。
上述配置附加DMRS数量的参数是通过高层RRC信令确定的,但是RRC信令的参数配置更新需要经过连接管理、无线承载控制和连接移动性等诸多过程,因此其更新时延较大。在更新前的一段时间内,多个时间单元上数据的发送均采用相同的附加DMRS的配置,即每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的最大允许个数的取值相同,以此对每个时间单元进行DMRS的配置。
能够利用的DMRS越多,则基于DMRS估计出的信道状态就越准确。基于上述,本申请提出了一种DMRS的配置方法,用于发送端基于该DMRS的配置进行联合发送,与之对应的,用于接收端基于该DMRS的配置进行联合信道估计。
当发送端能够保证多个时间单元上的DMRS保持相位连续性,即不引入收发端均未知的相位噪声时,接收端可以利用多个时间单元上的DMRS,做联合的信道估计,提高信道估计的准确性和数据解调的正确率。
具体的,以上行传输为例,通过在上行信号发送中限制终端设备在多个时间单元的发送条件,来保证多个时间单元上的发送的相位连续性,不引入收发端未知的随机相位,因而网络设备能够对接收到的多个时间单元上的上行信号进行联合信道估计;在下行信号接收中通过指示信息告知终端设备设备对多个时间单元进行联合信道估计,其中网络设备在不同时间单元上的发送也受一定的限制。下面结合图2,详细说明本申请实施例提供的联合信道估计的指示方法的技术方案。
S210网络设备向终端设备发送第一调度信息,第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
当第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同时,第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,第一时间单元上的传输不受第一条件的限制;
其中,第二时间单元为第一时间单元之前的时间单元,也可以理解为第二时间单元的时域顺序在第一时间之前。第一时间单元和第二时间单元可以是连续的时间单元,也可以是不连续的时间单元。第一时间单元与第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,例如,第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输均为上行传输,或者均为下行传输。又例如,第一时间单元与第二时间单元不连续,比如第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间存在不传输任何数据的时间单元,第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输时,提供了第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间传输的相位连续性的可能。
第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项,基于第一条件,终端设备在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上进行数据发送时,可以保证不同时间单元上的相位连续性。
第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,即表示第一时间单元上的传输和第二时间单元上的传输的方向相同。
相应地,终端设备接收第一调度信息,终端设备根据第一调度信息判断第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件。
情形一:当第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输为上行发送时:
终端设备基于第一调度信息确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
例如:当第一时间单元上对应的第一调度信息和第二时间单元上对应的第二调度信息相同时,则终端设备确定在第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,即需要和第二时间单元上的传输满足相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项。
网络设备在接收上行数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对上行传输数据的解调性能。当第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输为下行接收时:
情形二:当第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输为下行接收时:
终端设备基于第一调度信息确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
例如:当第一时间单元对应的第一调度信息和第二时间单元对应的第二调度信息相同时,则在第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,即终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输满 足第一条件,即第一时间单元上的数据传输和第二时间单元上的传输满足相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项。
终端设备在接收下行数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对上行传输数据的解调性能。
应理解,假设网络设备调度N个时间单元来传输,则N个时间单元一一对应网络设备下发的N个调度信息。即第一调度信息为第一时间单元对应的调度信息,第二调度信息为第二时间单元对应的调度信息,第一调度信息与第二调度信息为同一种调度信息。
上述第一调度信息与第二调度信息相同,可以理解为第一调度信息与第二调度信息的取值相同。
还应理解,第一时间单元上的传输可以包括,终端设备在第一时间单元上接收下行数据或者终端设备在第一时间单元上发送上行数据。
可选地,第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。也即第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于两条不同的DCI中。进一步可选的,第一调度信息可以是复用DCI中现有协议已定义的字段,也可以是现有协议为定义的新增字段,还可以现有协议中定义的保留字段,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
例如,本申请实施例利用DCI中的1比特的取值来判断第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件。
若DCI中承载第一调度信息对应的字段与第二调度信息对应的字段的取值相同时,第一时间单元上的传输要满足第一条件,即与第二时间单元上的传输保持相同的发送功率,相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;若第一调度信息对应的字段与第二调度信息对应的字段的取值不同时,第一时间单元上的数据传输可以满足第一条件,也可以不满足第一条件,也即第一时间上传输不用与第二时间单元上的传输保持相同的发送功率,相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项。例如,第一调度信息对应的字段与第二调度信息对应的字段均为1比特,该1比特均为0或者均为1时,第一时间单元上的传输要满足第一条件。
S220网络设备向终端设备发送第三调度信息,第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,第二条件包括如下一种或多种:发送设备不关闭功率放大器、发送设备不进行载频切换或者发送设备不进行天线切换。
具体地,终端设备在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上发送上行数据时,终端设备为发送设备。终端设备在第一持续时间内执行不关闭功率放大器、不进行载频切换或者不进行天线切换中的至少一种;终端设备在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上接收下行行数据时,网络设备为发送设备,网络设备在第一持续时间内执行不关闭功率放大器、不进行载频切换或者不进行天线切换中的至少一种。
应理解,第一时间单元和第二时间单元连续时,终端设备可以在第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件时,对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上接收的DMRS进行联合的信道估计;当第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续时,终端设备还需要通过第三调度信息指示网络设备在下行发送过程中是否满足第二条件,即网络设备在不连续的时间单元上是否执行不关闭功率放大器、不进行天线切换等操作,当满足第二条件和第一条件时,终端设备对不连续的第一时间单元和第二时间单元,依旧可以对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上接收 的DMRS进行联合的信道估计。
通过第一条件和第二条件,可以限制多个时间单元能够进行联合的信道估计。具体可以包括以下两种情形:
一种可能的情形,第一时间单元的第一调度信息和第二时间单元的第一调度信息相同,即满足第一条件,则第一时间单元可以和第二时间单元进行联合信道估计;第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间的时间单元对应的的第三调度信息和第一时间单元的第一调度信息相同,则该时间单元和第一时间也可以进行联合信道估计,因此,该时间单元可以和第一时间单元、第二时间单元进行联合的信道估计。逐次递推,对所有满足第一条件的多个时间单元可以进行统一的联合信道估计
另一种可能的情形,第一时间单元的第一指示信息和第二时间单元的第一调度信息相同,即满足第一条件,且当第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续时,还满足第二条件,则第一时间单元可以和第二时间单元进行联合信道估计;第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间的时间单元对应的第三调度信息和第一时间单元的第一调度信息相同,且当第二时间单元和第一时间单元不连续时,满足第二条件,则该时间单元和第一时间也可以进行联合信道估计,因此,该时间单元和第一时间单元、和第二时间单元可以进行联合的信道估计。逐次递推,对所有满足第一条件和第二条件的多个时间单元可以进行统一的联合信道估计
此外,上述第一时间单元和第二时间单元包含的时间单元数量可以相同或者不同,例如:时间单元为时隙,第一时间单元可以是重复传输对应的多个连续的时间单元,第二时间单元是非重复传输的单个时间单元。例如,第一调度信息可以承载在一个调度4次重复传输的DCI中,假设每次重复传输占据4个时隙,则第一时间单元包含重复传输的4个时隙,而第二调度信息承载在一个调度非重复传输的DCI中,假设该非重复传输占据1个时隙,则第二时间单元占据1个时隙。若第一条件和或第二条件满足,则可以对第一时间单元包含的4个时隙和第二时间单元包含的1个时隙,即一共5个时隙的DMRS进行联合信道估计。
可选地,第一持续时间可以为以下方式中的任一种:
方式一,第一时间段为包括第一时间单元和第二时间单元在内的一段时长,终端设备发送上行数据时需要在该一段时长内满足第二条件,或者,网络设备在发送下行数据时需要在该一段时长内满足第二条件。
方式二,当上述第一时间单元与第二时间单元为不连续时,比如第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间存在一个或多个时间单元,第一持续时间可以为第一时间单元与第二时间单元之间的一个或多个时间单元对应的时长,此时第一持续时间不包括第一时间单元和第二时间单元。这种情况下,终端设备发送上行数据时需要满足在第一时间单元和第二时间单元之间间隔的时间单元上满足第二条件。
方式三,第一持续时间可以理解为周期性的时间段。
第一持续时间可以是一个时间段,例如一毫秒或者几毫秒。第一持续时间也可以为一个或多个时间单元,例如一个或多个时隙,一个或多个时域符号。其中,第一持续时间包括第一时间单元与第二时间单元。
应理解,第一持续时间也可以有其他方式或者其他形式,本申请实施例并不此作具体限定。
可选地,第二条件在第一持续时间内有效。此时可以理解为,第一持续时间内可以限制网络设备发送下行数据或终端设备发送上行数据,如果时间超过了第一持续时间,则网络设备或者终端设备的数据发送则不受第二条件的限制。
可选地,第一持续时间由网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,第一持续时间为预定义的。
例如,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个参数,该参数的取值用来表征第一持续时间的时长,或者理解为,该参数的取值用来确定第二条件的有效限制时间;或者,该第一持续时间为预定义的,此时即不需要网络设备单独配置和发送第三调度信息。
S230当终端设备接收下行数据前,终端设备向网络设备上报能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
应理解,终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量受限于终端设备自身的能力,终端设备在接收下行数据前,需要向网络设备上报其是否支持联合信道估计。或者,终端设备需要向网络设备上报其最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量。
应理解,能力信息可以是一个字段,该字段包含一个或者多个比特,该字段的不同状态值或者不同取值指示不同的能力信息,具体的的指示包括以下几种可能的方式:
方式一:能力信息为1比特的指示信息,1比特的取值来告知网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元时间单元的联合信道估计。例如,1比特的取值为1时,终端设备能满足对多个时间单元的联合信道估计;1比特的取值为0时,终端设备不能支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计;
方式二:能力信息为终端设备配置的1个参数,该1个参数包含多个比特。该参数的不同取值用于指示终端设备可以最多支持联合信道估计的不同时间单元数量。该1个参数的取值可以直接指示出终端设备支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,也即该1个参数的取值和终端设备最多支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量相同。例如,能力信息的取值为6,指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。该1个参数的取值也可以根据预定义的关系对应一个时间单元的数量。例如,预定义的关系为该1个参数的取值为终端设备最多支持联合信道估计的时间单元的数量的二分之一,例如,能力信息的取值为3,指示终端设备做多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计。
方式三:能力信息包括多个比特的指示信息,该多个比特分包含第一比特部分和第二比特部分。其中,第一比特的取值指示网络设备终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。第二比特部分的取值指示终端设备可以最多支持多少个时间单元的联合信道估计。
应理解,能力信息也可以存在其他指示方式,本申请实施例并不对其作具体限定。
对终端设备而言,当需要进行联合信道估计的时间单元的数量小于终端设备最多可以支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量,终端设备可以执行联合信道估计;当需要进行联合信道估计的时间单元的数量大于终端设备最多可以支持的联合信道估计的时间单元的数量M时,终端设备无法执行联合信道估计,或者只能执行对M个相邻时间单元的联合信道估计。例如,能力信息指示终端设备最多可以支持6个时间单元的联合信道估计,此时,满足第一条件和/或满足第二条件的时间单元数量为8,则此时:可选地,终端设备不能支持对满足第一条件和/或满足第二条件的时间单元进行联合信道估计,或者,终端设 备只能对6个满足第一条件和或第二条件的时间单元进行联合信道估计,例如:终端设备可以分别对时间单元#1-6进行联合信道估计,对时间单元#2-7进行联合信道估计,对时间单元#3-8进行联合信道估计。
因此,终端设备上报能力信息,有助于网络设备根据终端设备的能力为终端设备调度时域资源,提升通信性能。
S240终端设备在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,终端设备在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
当第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,且第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输均为下行接收时,终端设备确定网络设备在发送下行数据时满足第一条件,终端设备基于第一时间单元上的DMRS和第二时间单元上的DMRS对第一时间单元和第二时间单元进行联合信道估计,或者,当第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,且第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输均为上行发送时,终端设备确定其在发送上行数据时满足第一条件,与之对应的,网络设备基于第一时间单元上的DMRS和第二时间单元上的DMRS进行联合信道估计。
可选地,时间单元可以为时隙,子时隙,帧,子帧一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。本申请实施例并不对其作具体限定。
具体地,结合举例,进一步详细说明本申请实施例的技术方案。
第一时间单元和第二时间单元上的传输,可以包括发送上行数据或者接收下行数据两种情形:
情形一:下面以终端设备发送上行数据为例,当在第二时间单元上的发送对应的第二调度信息取值为1,当第二时间单元之后的第一时间单元也用于上行发送,且第二时间单元和第一时间单元中间没有下行接收,则第一时间单元的发送需要满足第一条件,即:当第一时间上的发送对应的第一调度信息取值也为1时,则终端设备在第一时间单元上的发送需要采用和第二时间单元上的发送功率、预编码、天线端口和频域资源配置等,使得终端设备在第一时间单元上的发送能够保持与第二时间单元上发送的相位连续性,网络设备在接收上行数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对上行传输数据的解调性能。
当第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续时,例如:时间单元为时隙,每个时隙包含14个时域符号,终端设备在第一时间单元上进行14个时域符号的PUSCH发送,在第二时间单元上进行12个时域符号的PUSCH的发送,在第二时间单元的第13和14个时域符号上没有用于接收下行数据,例如,第二时间单元的第13和14个时域符号可以是空余的上行或者灵活时域符号,或者也可以是用于发送信道探测参考信号的两个上行时域符号。当终端设备基于接收的第一调度信息确定第一时间单元上的发送要满足第一条件时,针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续,还需要指示终端设备在不连续的时间单元上需要满足第二条件,即不能出现破坏第一时间单元和第二时间单元发送信号相位连续性的操作行为,例如:终端设备不能关闭功率放大器(及时不发送信号)、不能进行天线切换等。
应理解,所述终端设备在不连续的时间单元上需要满足第二条件,可以是独立的第三调度信息进行指示,也可以通过第一调度信息进行隐式指示,此时第三调度信息与第一调度信息承载于同一字段,即当终端设备确定第一时间单元的发送需要满足第一条件时,则 默认针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续的情况,也需要同时满足第二条件。
情形二:下面以网络设备发送下行数据为例,当在第二时间单元上的发送对应的第二调度信息取值为0,当第二时间单元之后的第一时间单元也用于下行接收,且第二时间单元和第一时间单元中间没有上行发送,则第一时间单元的发送需要满足第一条件,即:当第一时间上的发送对应给的第一调度信息取值也为0时,则网络设备在第一时间单元上的发送需要采用和第二时间单元上的发送功率、预编码、天线端口和频域资源配置等,使得网络设备在第一时间单元上的发送能够保持与第二时间单元上发送的相位连续性,终端设备在接收下行数据时才能够对第一时间单元和第二时间单元上满足相位连续性的DMRS进行合并,实现更准确的信道估计,改善对上行传输数据的解调性能。
当第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续时,例如:时间单元为时隙,每个时隙包含14个时域符号,网络设备在第一时间单元上进行14个时域符号的PDSCH发送,在第二时间单元上进行12个时域符号的PDSCH的发送,在第二时间单元的第13和14个时域符号上没有用于发送上行数据,例如,第二时间单元的第13和14个时域符号可以是空余的下行或者灵活时域符号,或者也可以是用于接收信道探测参考信号的两个下行时域符号。当终端设备基于接收的第一调度信息确定第一时间单元上的发送要满足第一条件时,针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续,还需要告知终端设备在网络设备在不连续的时间单元上需要满足第二条件,即不能出现破坏第一时间单元和第二时间单元发送信号相位连续性的操作行为,例如:网络设备不能关闭功率放大器(及时不发送信号)、不能进行天线切换等。
应理解,所述网络设备在不连续的时间单元上需要满足第二条件,可以是独立的第三调度信息进行指示,也可以通过第一调度信息进行隐式指示,此时第三调度信息与第一调度信息承载于同一字段,即当终端设备确定第一时间单元的发送需要满足第一条件时,则默认针对第一时间单元和第二时间单元不连续的情况,也需要同时满足第二条件。
通过对多个时间单元的所有DMRS进行联合的信道估计,能够改善信道估计的准确性,提升数据的解调性能,改善传输能力。
以上简单介绍了联合信道估计的限制条件,下面结合图3,详细说明本申请实施例提供的灵活联合配置K个时间单元中DMRS数量的技术方案。
S310网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与第三时间单元具有相同的DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,第三时间单元与第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量。
应理解,本申请实施例提到的DMRS的配置数量指的是DMRS的数量,与DMRS占据的时域符号数量是不同的,下文不再赘述。
例如,第一指示信息的取值为2,则表示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔2个时间单元,也即此时有两个第五时间单元。第三时间单元与第四时间单元按照dmrs-AdditionalPosition取值为pos3进行DMRS的配置,两个第五时间单元上的DMRS配置方式可以有以下三种方式:
方式一:不配置DMRS,既不配置前置DMRS也不配置附加DMRS。
方式二:只配置1个DMRS,该1个DMRS为前置DMRS,也即此时不配置附加DMRS。
方式三:配置2个DMRS,即配置了1个前置DMRS和1个附加DMRS。
例如第三时间单元和第四时间单元中前置DMRS和附加DMRS的总数量均为4个,两个第五时间单元上的DMRS的总数量小于或等于2个,小于第三时间单元和第四时间单元上DMRS配置数量数量。其中,第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量可以是预定义的网络设备通过单独的信令指示的,本申请实施例对其指示方式和指示信息的承载位置不作具体限定。
S320网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于确定多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K。
应理解,第二指示信息用于指示联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元数量。
确定联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元数数量可能包括以下几种方式:
方式一:当多个时间单元中每个时间单元上传输的数据块不完全相同时,不完全相同可以理解为多个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,或者也可以理解为多个时间单元上传输的数据块部分相同,且其余部分不相同。可以通过第二指示信息的取值确定联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元的数量,或者其取值对应的索引值确定需要联合配置DMRS的时间单元的数量。例如,第二指示信息的取值为4,或者第二指示信息取值的索引值对应的取值为4,则表示终端设备确定了4个时间单元的DMRS数量的联合配置;
方式二:多个时间单元上传输相同的数据块时,传输块的重复传输次数用于确定多个时间单元的时间单元数量。
应理解,当多个时间单元上传输相同的数据块时,可以发送第二指示信息也可以不发送第二指示信息。若发送,则第二指示信息用于指示是否开启联合信道估计的功能。在重复传输中,且当第二指示信息指示开启联合信道估计时,则需要联合配置DMRS的时间单元的数量等于配置的重复传输的次数,重复传输的次数由RRC信令配置。比如第二指示信息可以有两种取值,其第一取值表示终端设备开启多个时间单元的联合信道估计,第二取值表示终端设备关闭多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
应理解,也可以通过第二指示信息对应的索引值来确定是否开启联合信道估计。上述第二指示信息的取值与是否开启信道联合估计的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其确定方式和对应关系作具体限定。
第一指示信息指示的第三时间单元和第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量与第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量的关系可能存在以下几种情形:
情形一:第一指示信息指示的第三时间单元和第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量等于第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,此时K个时间单元上采用“前后密中间疏”的DMRS配置:
即第三时间单元与第四时间单元为第二指示信息确定的K个时间单元中的首尾两个时间单元。此时第三时间单元与第四时间单元上配置较多的时间单元,中间的第五时间单元上配置较少的DMRS数量。第五时间单元上DMRS的配置方式可能有上述几种方式,这里不再赘述,即保证第五时间单元上的DMRS的数量小于第三时间单元与第四时间单元上配置的DMRS数量即可。
例如:第一指示信息指示的间隔的时间单元数量为4,第二指示信息指示的多个时间 单元的数量为6,则时间单元#1-6,在时间单元#1,#6配置的DMRS较多,例如,可以按照附加DMRS数量的配置的取值Pos3配置DMRS;而中间的4个时间单元上,即时间单元#2-5上配置的DMRS较少。
情形二:第一指示信息指示的第三时间单元和第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量大于第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2,此时K个时间单元上采用“前密后疏”的DMRS配置:
即第三时间单元为第二指示信息确定的K个时间单元中的首个时间单元。第四时间单元不在K个时间单元当中。此时第三时间单元上配置较多的时间单元,其余的时间单元配置较少的DMRS数量。中间间隔的时间单元上DMRS的配置方式可能有上述几种方式,这里不再赘述,即保证中间时间单元上的上DMRS的数量小于第三时间单元上配置的DMRS数量即可。
例如:第一指示信息指示的间隔的时间单元数量为5,第二指示信息指示的多个时间单元的数量为6,则时间单元#1-6中,在时间单元1配置的DMRS较多,例如,可以按照附加DMRS数量的配置的取值Pos3配置DMRS;而在后续的5个时间单元上,即时间单元#2-6上配置的DMRS较少。
此外,以一个时间单元为一个时隙为例,当时隙#2-6上配置的DMRS数量较少时,可以在时隙1上配置更多DMRS,甚至超过4个DMRS,即在时隙1上配置的附加DMRS的数量可以超过3个。只需要满足六个时隙上总的DMRS开销不会太大即可。可理解为将时隙#2-6上可配的DMRS统一都配置到了时隙1上,因此终端设备或者网络设备可以在收到时隙1上的DMRS之后,能够利用集中到一个时隙上的多个DMRS进行快速而准确的信道估计,不但减少了时延而且提高了收端解调数据的效率。
情形三:第一指示信息指示的第三时间单元和第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量小于第二指示信息确定的多个时间单元的数量减2:
即第三时间单元与第四时间单元为第二指示信息确定的K个时间单元中的任意两个时间单元。此时第三时间单元与第四时间单元上配置较多的时间单元,其余的时间单元配置较少的DMRS数量。中间间隔的时间单元上DMRS的配置方式可能有上述几种方式,这里不再赘述,即保证中间时间单元上的上DMRS的数量小于第三时间单元与第四时间单元上配置的DMRS数量即可。
例如:第一指示信息指示的间隔的时间单元数量为2,第二指示信息指示的多个时间单元的数量为6,则时间单元#1-6中,在时间单元#1,#4配置的DMRS较多,例如,可以按照附加DMRS数量的配置的取值Pos3配置DMRS;而在其余的4个时间单元上,即时间单元#2,#3,#5上配置的DMRS较少。
接下来以1个时间单元为1个时隙为例,图3给出了本申请实施例配置4个时隙中附加DMRS数量的几种情况。
如表2所示,假设每次PUSCH或者PDSCH传输调度的时域符号数量Ld为14,RRC信令配置的参数dmrs-Additional Position=Pos2,maxLength=len1,PUSCH采用typeA的方式传输,按照当前协议规定的映射关系,此时每个时间单元最多可以配置2个附加DMRS。前置DMRS占据的时域符号为l
0,两个附加DMRS占据的时域符号分别为7,11,且每个DMRS占据1个时域符号。
表2 PUSCH单符号DMRS位置l
此时网络设备配置的第二指示信息确定的时间单元的数量为4,表示终端设备对4个时间单元上即4个时隙上的附加DMRS进行联合配置。
如附图4(a)所示,RRC信令指示终端对K个时间单元采用相同的DMRS配置信息,4个时隙中每个时隙上都配置了DMRS,且4个时隙上配置的附加DMRS的数量均相同。
假设第一指示信息指示每间隔1个时间单元才配置DMRS,即配置相同数量的DMRS的时隙之间的时间间隔数量为1。如图4(b)所示,第二个时隙和第四个时隙上的附加DMRS的配置被取消,仅在第二个时隙和第四个时隙上配置前置DMRS;
若此时第一指示信息指示每间隔1个时间单元才配置DMRS,即配置相同数量的DMRS的时隙之间的时间间隔为1。此时还存在另外一种配置方式,如图4(c)所示,取消第二个时隙和第四个时隙中所有DMRS配置,即既不配置前置DMRS,也不配置附加DMRS。
应理解,间隔的时间单元采用最小的DMRS配置密度,即也存在第二个时隙中只配置前置DMRS,第四个时隙中既不配置前置DMRS又不配置附加DMRS的情况。具体采用哪种配置方式可以是预定义的,或者采用额外的指示信息确定,本申请实施例并不对配置方式的确定作具体限定。
S330可选地,终端设备接收多个时间单元上的数据前,终端设备向网络设备上报第一能力信息,第一能力信息用于指示终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于等于2的正整数。
应理解,终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量是有限的,取决于终端设备的能力。在网络设备向终端设备指示联合信道估计的时间单元数量之前,终端设备会主动向网络设备上报自己的能力信息。例如终端设备通过RRC信令配置了一个参数,参数的 取值为4,指示该终端设备最多可支持4个时隙的联合信道估计,也可以指示4个子时隙的联合信道估计,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选地,K小于等于M。
应理解,终端设备不期望网络设备下发的指示信息中指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量等于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量。例如,多个时间单元上传输相同的数据块时,网络设备通过配置数据块的重复传输次数确定了联合信道估计的时间单元数量,此时确定的时间单元数量可以与终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量不相等;或者,多个时间单元上传输的数据块不完全相同时,网络设备通过发送第二指示信息确定的时间单元数量可以与终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量不相等。
应理解,当网络设备指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量小于或等于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量时,此时应联合信道估计的时间单元数量以网络设备指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量为准;网络设备指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量大于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量时,此时应联合信道估计的时间单元数量以终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量为准。
具体地,当网络设备指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量大于终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量时,例如网络设备指示的联合信道估计的时间单元数量为8个时隙,终端设备可支持的联合信道估计的时间单元数量为4个时隙。终端设备执行联合信道估计的相关操作包括如下两种方式:
方式一:终端设备对8个时隙的联合信道估计作“截断”处理。即终端设备先执行时隙#1-4的联合信道估计的操作,再进行时隙#5-8的联合信道估计的操作。以终端设备接收下行数据为例,终端设备利用时隙#1-4上配置的DMRS进行联合信道估计,并基于估计出的信道,完成对时隙#1-4上接收数据的解调,然后在利用时隙#5-8上配置的DMRS进行联合信道估计,并基于估计出的信道,完成对时隙#5-8上接收数据的解调。
方式二:终端设备对8个时隙的联合信道估计作“滑动”处理。即终端设备先执行时隙#1-4的联合信道估计的操作;再存入时隙#5中的DMRS信息同时将存储的时隙#1中的DMRS信息删除,终端设备执行#5、#2、#3、#4时隙共4个时隙的联合信道估计的操作;然后存入时隙#6中的DMRS信息同时将存储的时隙2中的DMRS信息删除,终端设备执行#5、#6、#3、#4时隙共4个时隙的联合信道估计的操作,以此类推。
终端设备采用哪种联合信道估计的方式可以为预定义的,也可以通过额外的指示信息指示,或者是除了上述2种方式之外的其他方法,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定也不对指示信息的承载位置作具体限定。
至此,终端设备可以根据上述指示信息确定联合信道估计即联合配置DMRS数量的时间单元数量的取值为K,也可以确定配置较多的DMRS数量的时间单元之间的间隔。
可选地,上述第一指示信息、第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令中,本实施例对其承载位置不作具体限定。
可选地,当K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于等于K的正整数。
应理解,“居中的”时域符号指的是某个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号,本申请实施例并不限制“居中的”时域符号为最中间的某个时域符号。
例如,第j个时间单元包括m个时域符号,则前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号位置为第j个时间单元上的第m/2时域符号。当m/2的计算结果不是整数时,则可以向上取整或者向下取整,取整方式可以是预定义的或者通过额外的指示信息确定的,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
例如,以1个时间单元为一次PUSCH上的数据块传输为例,当前网络设备调度的PUSCH占据的时域符号为14个,即上述第j个时间单元占据的时域符号数量为14,此时前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号可以为第7个时域符号,也可以为第6或第8个时域符号,即保证前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为居中的时域符号即可。本申请实施例不对居中的时域符号的位置作具体限定。
可选地,上述前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置。网络设备向终端设备发送额外的指示信息,该信息用于确定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号。
应理解,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号也可以预定义的,此时则不需要额外指示信息的指示。。
可选地,本申请实施例提到的时间单元可以是时隙slot,或者子时隙sub-slot,还可以指一次数据块传输占据的时域资源,本申请实施例对其含义不作具体限定。
当终端设备联合估计PDSCH的信道质量时,终端接收上述指示信息之后,终端设备根据K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS,对网络设备发送的下行数据进行解调;
当网络设备联合估计PUSCH信道质量时,终端设备接收上述指示信息之后,在K个时间单元中的每个时间单元发送上行数据时如上述指示信息确定的方式配置DMRS,网络设备对终端设备发送的上行数据进行解调。
应理解,本申请实施例中提到的S310、S320、S330、的描述不是用来表示步骤的时序,只是用于对不同的步骤进行编号加以区分。
应理解,上述指示信息还可以指示K个时间单元中DMRS总数量的联合配置,DMRS的总数量为前置DMRS与附加DMRS的总和;上述指示信息可以指示K个时间单元中附加DMRS数量的变化量的联合配置,附加DMRS数量的变化量时基于RRC信令配置的dmrs-additionnal position字段的取值而言的上述指示信息还可以指示K个时间单元中的DMRS总数量的变化量,还可以指示前置DMRS的数量,或者前置DMRS的变化量等,本申请实施例对不对RRC信令可以指示的DMRS的数量信息种类作具体限定。
以上,详细说明了本申请提供的高层信令灵活联合地配置K个时间单元中DMRS数量的方案,经过上述步骤,网络设备或者终端设备可以通过上述指示信息确定K个时间单元中DMRS数量的联合配置,改善系统的频谱效率,以合理分配DMRS的开销。
下面结合图5,详细说明本申请另一种实施例提供的灵活联合配置K个时间单元中DMRS数量配置的技术方案。
S510网络设备向终端设备发送第一下行控制信息DCI,第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,第一DMRS图样用于指示K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数。
其中,K的取值的确定包括以下几种情形:
情形一:K的取值为协议规定的。例如未来的协议可能规定在一段时间内或者网络设备调度的几个时间单元之内,每个DMRS配置图样对应的时间单元的数量均为K;
情形二:K的取值为网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的。即网络设备通过第一DCI指示第一DMRS配置图样,再通过额外的指示信息告知终端设备该第一DMRS配置图样所对应的时间单元数量。其中,该指示信息的取值或对应的索引值用于确定K的取值,该指示信息可以位于RRC信令或者DCI中,本申请实施例并不对其指示方式和其承载位置作具体限定。
可选地,当多个时间单元上传输相同的传输块时,额外的指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数;
应理解,该指示信息用于指示是否开启联合信道估计的功能。在重复传输中,且当该指示信息指示开启联合信道估计时,则需要联合配置DMRS的时间单元的数量等于配置的重复传输的次数,重复传输的次数由RRC信令配置。比如该指示信息可以有两种取值,其第一取值表示终端设备开启多个时间单元的联合信道估计,第二取值表示终端设备关闭多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
还应理解,也可以通过该指示信息对应的索引值来确定是否开启联合信道估计。该指示信息的取值与是否开启信道联合估计的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其确定方式和对应关系作具体限定。
可选地,当多个时间单元传输不完全相同同的传输块时,该指示信息用于确定K个时间单元中的不同数据块的数量,应理解,不完全相同可以理解为K个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,也可以理解为K个时间单元上传输的数据块部分相同,且部分不同。
情形三:K的取值由第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定。即终端设备根据第一DCI索引到的第一DMRS配置图样,可以确定第一DMRS图样中对应的dmrs-AdditionalPosition的数量,每一个dmrs-AdditionalPosition参数对应一个时间单元。例如,当第一DMRS配置图样的取值内容为{Pos2,Pos0,Pos2,Pos0},即包含有4个取值,则隐含的指示对K=4个时间单元进行联合的DMRS配置,即第1-4个时间单元最多允许配置的附加DMRS个数分别为2,0,2,0个。
作为一个例子,若DMRS配置图样集合中存在以下三种DMRS配置图样:
第一种:RRC信令配置参数dmrs-Additional Position为Pos2。
第二种:RRC信令配置参数dmrs-Additional Position为Pos2-Pos0…-Pos0。
第三种:RRC信令配置参数dmrs-Additional Position为Pos2-Pos0-…-Pos0-Pos2。
当终端设备通过第一DCI索引指示的第一DMRS为第一种图样,结合预定义的或者网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的或者第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的K值,终端设备最终确定K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上采用附加DMRS数量的均匀配置;
当终端设备通过第一DCI索引指示的第一DMRS为第二种图样,结合预定义的或者网络设备通过第四指示信息指示的或者第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的K值,终端设备最终确定K个时间单元中第一个时间单元上采用较多的DMRS数量配置,之后的时间单元采用较少的DMRS配置,即“前密后疏型”DMRS配置图样。
当终端设备通过第一DCI索引指示的第一DMRS为第三种图样,结合预定义的或者网络设备通过第四指示信息指示的或者第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量确定的K值,终端设备最终确定K个时间单元中首尾时间单元上采用较多的DMRS数量配置,中间的时间单元采用较少的DMRS配置,即“前后密中间疏型”DMRS配置图样。
应理解,上述三种DMRS配置图样仅用于举例,本申请实施例对DMRS配置图样图样的种类不作具体限定。
此时应理解,终端设备并不期望第一DCI指示的第一DMRS确定的K值与预定义的K值或者网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的K值相等。
应理解,DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样。
假设DMRS配置图样集合中包含L种DMRS配置图样,L为大于等于2的正整数,则L种DMRS配置图样的分布有以下几种可能:
可选地,L种DMRS配置图样中包括L种K
1个时间单元上的DMRS配置图样,即在L
1个时间单元上可以有L种DMRS配置图样;
可选地,L种DMRS配置图样中包括L
1种K
1个时间单元上的DMRS配置图样、L
2中K
2个时间单元上的DMRS图样…L
n种K
n个时间单元上的DMRS图样,其中L
1+L
2+…+L
n=L,K
1,K
2,…K
n互不相等。
应理解,DMRS配置图样集合可以为DMRS数量的配置集合。例如,第一DCI可以用来索引K个时间单元中附加DMRS数量的配置方案,第一DCI也可以用来索引K个时间单元中的附加DMRS的数量的变化量的配置方案,或者K个时间单元中DMRS总数量的配置方案、或者K个时间单元中的DMRS的总数量的变化量的配置方案,或者是前置DMRS的数量的配置方案,或者是前置DMRS的变化量的配置方案等,本申请实施例对其可以索引的内容不作具体限定。
下面以1个时间单元为1个时隙,每个时隙上的附加DMRS数量配置图样为例,详细介绍本申请实施例中RRC信令中包括多种不同的附加DMRS数量的配置图样的情形:
情形一:
RRC信令配置参数maxLenth=len1时,即一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1,2,3},若此时RRC信令配置参数dmrs-Additional Position-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2…Pos sK},则K个时隙中每个时隙附加DMRS数量的可能取值均为{0,1,2,3},则RRC此时可能包括4^K种不同的附加DMRS数量的配置方案;
例如,K=2,即dmrs-Additional Position-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2},其中一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1,2,3},另一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1,2,3},则两个时隙最多可以有4^2共16种配置方案;
K=4,即dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,Pos s3},则4个时隙最多可以有4^4共256种配置方案;
K=8,即dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,Pos s3,Pos s5,Pos s6,Pos s7,Pos s8},则8个时隙最多可以有4^8=65536种配置方案;
另外,除上述多种配置方案,还可以包括在K个时隙中任何一个或者多个时隙中,使该一个时隙或者多个时隙的DMRS数量为附加DMRS数量取值为{0,1,2,3}之外的另外取值,即既不配置前置DMRS,也不配置附加DMRS。
RRC配置的附加DMRS数量的配置方案集合可以包括上述各种组合。
情形二:
RRC信令配置参数maxLenth=len2时,即一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1},若此时RRC信令配置参数dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2…Pos sK},则K个时隙中每个时隙附加DMRS数量的可能取值均为{0,1},则RRC此时可能包括2^K种不同的附加DMRS数量的配置方案;
RRC信令配置参数maxlenth=Len1时,即一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1,2,3},若此时RRC信令配置参数dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2…Pos sK},则K个时隙中每个时隙附加DMRS数量的可能取值均为{0,1,2,3},则RRC此时可能包括2^K种不同的附加DMRS数量的配置方案;
例如,K=2,即dmrs-additionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2},其中一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1},另一个时隙中附加DMRS数量的可能取值为{0,1},则两个时隙最多可以有2^2共4种配置方案;
K=4,即dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,Pos s3},则4个时隙最多可以有2^4共16种配置方案;
K=8,即dmrs-AdditionalPosition-multiSlot={Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,Pos s3,Pos s5,Pos s6,Pos s7,Pos s8},则8个时隙最多可以有2^8种配置方案;
另外,除上述多种配置方案,还可以包括在K个时隙中任何一个或者多个时隙中,使该一个时隙或者多个时隙的DMRS数量为附加DMRS数量取值为{0,1}之外的另外取值,即既不配置前置DMRS,也不配置附加DMRS。
RRC配置的多种附加DMRS的配置方案可以包括上述各种组合。
可选地,L种附加DMRS数量配置方案中,maxLength只能有1个取值,即L种配置方案的每个时隙中的前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量是相同的;当然,L种附加DMRS数量的配置方案中,maxLength可以有两个取值,即每一种配置方案中K个时隙的前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量不同,本申请实施例对maxLength的取值不作具体限定。
可选地,上述DMRS配置图样集合由RRC信令配置。此时网络设备需要向终端设备发送RRC信令。
可选地,上述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。例如在网络设备和终端设备被使用之前,就已将网络设备预定义的多种附加DMRS数量的配置方案集合内嵌入终端设备之中,则网络设备可以不向终端设备发送RRC信令,降低了网络设备侧的信令开销。
S520第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,网络设备向终端设备发送MAC CE信令,MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据第一DCI的的索引值,从DMRS配置图样集合中确定第一DMRS配置图样。
应理解,若网络设备未向终端设备发送触发信令MAC CE信令,即无MAC CE信令去激活终端设备根据第一DCI去确定第一DMRS图样,终端设备依然按照RRC信令配置的参数dmrs-additionalPosition、max Length等参数的取值来配置每个时间单元的DMRS,并进行上行发送或者下行的接收。
例如,终端设备可以根据第一DCI中包括的比特的取值,索引DMRS配置图样。表 3给出了以第一DCI中包括5比特为例,maxlenth的取值为len1时,第一DCI的5比特取值与K个时隙上的附加DMRS数量的对应关系。
表3第一DCI与K个时隙上DMRS数量的对应关系
由表3可知,例如,当第一DCI中5比特的取值为00000时,其索引值对应的DMRS数量配置图样中,RRC信令配置了两个dmrs-additionalPosition的取值,即第一DCI此时指示的配置图样是针对两个时隙的联合配置,且第一个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为0;第二个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为0,附加DMRS数量也为0。
当第一DCI的5比特取值为01011时,其索引值对应的DMRS数量配置图样中,RRC信令配置了3个dmrs-additionalPosition的取值,即第一DCI此时指示的配置图样是针对3个时隙的联合配置,且第一个时隙的前置DMRS数量为1,附加DMRS数量为1;第二个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为0;第三个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS的数量为零。
类似地,表4给出了以第一DCI中包括5比特为例,maxlenth的取值为len2时,第一DCI中的5比特取值与K个时隙上的附加DMRS数量的对应关系。
表4第一DCI与K个时隙上DMRS数量的对应关系
由表4可知,例如,当第一DCI中5比特的取值为00110时,其索引值对应的DMRS数量配置图样中,RRC信令配置了3个dmrs-additionalPosition的取值,即第一DCI此时指示的配置图样是针对3个时隙的联合配置,且第一个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为1;第二个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为0;第三个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为0。
当第一DCI的5比特取值为01110时,其指示的DMRS数量配置图样中,RRC信令配置了4个dmrs-additionalPosition的取值,即第一DCI此时指示的配置图样是针对4个时隙的联合配置,且第一个时隙的前置DMRS数量为1,附加DMRS数量为1;第二个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为0;第三个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS的数量为1,第四个时隙中前置DMRS的数量为1,附加DMRS数量为1。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于等于K的正整数。
例如表4,当第一DCI种的5比特取值为00110时,其索引值对应的DMRS数量配置图样中,RRC信令配置了3个dmrs-additionalPosition的取值,即第一DCI此时指示的配置图样是针对3个时隙的联合配置,第二个时隙上只配置了一个前置DMRS,则该时隙上的前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第二个时隙上居中的时域符号。
应理解,“居中的”时域符号指的是某个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号,本申请实施例并不限制“居中的”时域符号为最中间的某个时域符号。
例如,当第二个时隙占据的时域符号为14个,即上述第j个时间单元占据的时域符号数量为14,此时前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号可以为第7个时域符号,也可以为第6或第8个时域符号,即保证前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为居中的时域符号即可。本申请实施例不对居中的时域符号的位置作具体限定。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置。网络设备需要向终端设备发送RRC信令,以确定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号;
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。此时网络设备不需要向终端设备发送定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号的RRC信令。
应理解,表3、表4中的比特的取值与附加DMRS配置数量的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对第一DCI中M比特的取值与K个时间单元中附加DMRS数量配置图样的对应关系作具体限定。
应理解,每个时间单元中实际可以配置的DMRS的数量受限于每个时间单元中PUSCH或者PDSCH占用的时域符号数量,因此本申请实施例提出的利用比特值确定时间单元中DMRS数量信息的技术方案,是针对于此时间单元上DMRS最多可能配置的数量而言的。
应理解,本申请实施例中提到的S510、S520描述不是用来表示步骤的时序,只是用于对不同的步骤进行编号加以区分。
应理解,本申请实施例提到的时间单元可以是时隙slot,或者子时隙sub-slot,还可以指一次数据块传输占据的时域资源,本申请实施例对其不作具体限定。
当终端设备联合估计PDSCH的信道质量时,终端接收第一DCI之后,终端设备根据K个时间单元中的每个时间单元的DMRS,对网络设备发送的下行数据进行解调;
当网络设备联合估计PUSCH的信道质量时,终端设备接收第一DCI之后,在K个时间单元中的每个时间单元发送上行数据时如上述方式配置DMRS,网络设备对终端设备发送的上行数据进行解调。
以上,详细说明了本申请提供的结合第一DCI和高层信令灵活地配置K个时间单元中附加DMRS数量的配置方案的技术方案,经过上述步骤,终端设备可以根据第一DCI确定该K个时间单元的一种DMRS数量配置,能够实现灵活配置K个时间单元中的附加DMRS的数量,以合理分配DMRS的开销。
下面结合图6,详细说明本申请实施例提供的灵活调整K个时间单元中DMRS数量配置的技术方案。
S610网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息。
第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,第一信息指示的K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数。
应理解,当终端设备收到K个时间单元做联合信道估计的共同指示时,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量最多配置1个,即附加DMRS的候选取值只能为{0,1}。因为联合信道估计时,相比单个时间单元的DMRS数量,已经有更多的DMRS可以用,不需要每个时间单元上再配置2个或3个附加DMRS,减少了DMRS开销。
可选地,K大于第一门限值。
可选地,网络设备还配置了第一门限值,当K个时间单元做联合信道估计时,当K大于第一门限值时,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量最多配置1个,即附加DMRS的候选取值只能为{0,1}。因为联合信道估计时,相比单个时间单元的DMRS数量,已经有更多的DMRS可以用,不需要每个时间单元再配置2个或3个附加DMRS,减少了DMRS的开销。
可选地,第一门限值可以为预定义的;
可选地,第一门限值由网络设备通过第二信息指示的。
第一信息和第二信息可以承载于同一条的信令或者不同的信令,比如RRC信令还活着DCI。本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
应理解,当第一门限值与K相等时,此时K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上也最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS。
可选地,第一门限值的可能取值可以为2,4,8等,第一门限值大于等于2。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于等于K的正整数。
应理解,“居中的”时域符号指的是某个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号,本申请实施例并不限制“居中的”时域符号为最中间的某个时域符号。
例如,以1个时间单元为一次PUSCH上的数据块传输为例,当前网络设备调度的PUSCH占据的时域符号为14个,即上述第j个时间单元占据的时域符号数量为14,此时前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号可以为第7个时域符号,也可以为第6或第8个时域符号,即保证前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为居中的时域符号即可。本申请实施例不对居中的时域符号的位置作具体限定。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置。网络设备需要向终端设备发送RRC信令,以确定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号;
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。此时网络设备不需要向终端设备发送定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号的RRC信令。
应理解,该步骤中的时间单元可以是时隙slot、子时隙sub-slot或者1次数据块传输所占据的时域资源,本申请实施例对其含义不作具体限定。
应理解,每个时间单元中实际可以配置的DMRS的数量受限于每个时间单元中PUSCH或者PDSCH占用的时域符号数量,因此本申请实施例提出的利用第一信息确定时间单元中DMRS数量的技术方案,是针对于此时该时间单元中DMRS最多可能配置的数量而言的。
当终端设备联合估计PDSCH的信道质量时,终端设备接收第一信息之后,终端设备根据N个时间单元中的每个时间单元的DMRS数量,对网络设备发送的下行数据进行解调;
当网络设备联合估计PUSCH的信道质量时,终端设备接收第一信息之后,在K个时间单元中的每个时间单元发送上行数据时如上述方式配置DMRS的数量,网络设备对终端设备发送的上行数据进行解调。
以上,详细说明了本申请提供的灵活配置K个时间单元中DMRS数量的技术方案。经过上述步骤,网络设备或者终端设备可以通过第一信息指示K个时间单元中DMRS数量配置,降低DMRS的总开销,保证足够的信道估计准确性,改善传输的效率和性能。
下面结合图7,详细说明本申请实施例提供的灵活配置N个时间单元中DMRS数量的技术方案。
S710网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量信息。第三指示信息包括N个取值,N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应。第i个取值对应于N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元中的DMRS的数量信息,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N。
可选地,当RRC信令配置的参数maxLength=len2时,第i个取值用1比特确定;当maxLength取值为len1时,第i个取值用2比特确定。
应理解,当RRC信令配置的参数maxLength=len2时,第i个取值至少用1比特确定;当maxLength取值为len1时,第i个取值至少用2比特确定。本申请实施例并不对用于确定第i个取值的比特数作具体限定。
应理解,第三指示信息的承载位置包括以下两种方式:
方式一:第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,例如,第三指示信息包括N个取值,分别为{Pos s1,Pos s2,Pos s3,…,Pos sN},每一个取值对应于N个时间单元中每个时间单元上的附加DMRS的位置,Pos si的取值与N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量信息相对应。
网络设备或者终端设备可以通过第三指示信息灵活配置N个时间单元上的DMRS数量。在联合信道估计中,一方面能够保证足够的信道估计准确性,另一方面能够保证较低的DMRS总开销,有助于改善传输的效率和性能。
方式二:第三指示信息承载于DCI中,第三指示信息包括N组比特,N组比特与N个时间单元一一对应,N个取值中的第i个取值对应于N组比特中的第i组比特,即第i个取值通过第i组比特确定。
网络设备或者终端设备可以通过DCI上承载的第三指示信息指示N个时间单元上的DMRS数量配置,实现了DMRS配置数量的动态调整,且减少了时延。
可选地,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和,DMRS的数量信息的种类为预定义的,或者,DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示。
S720网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于确定DMRS的数量信息的种类。
当第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,此时DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类,本申请实施例并不对其指示方式作具体限定。若网络设备未向终端设备发送该信息,或者该指示信息的取值为缺省时,此时默认第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,此时S720是可选的步骤。
当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,此时DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过 配置信息指示,包括利用配置信息的取值或取值的索引值来确定DMRS的数量信息的种类,本申请实施例并不对其指示方式作具体限定,此时S720是必须的步骤。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示该N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,包括两种可能的情形:
情形一:此时第i个取值用1比特来确定时,此时1比特的候选取值为{0,1},分别代表第i个时间单元上附加DMRS的数量为{0,1}。
若第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS,则第i个时间单元上DMRS的总数量的最大允许取值为{1,2};若第i个时间单元上未配置前置DMRS,则第i个时间单元上DMRS的总数量的最大允许取值为{0,1};
情形二:此时第i个取值用2比特来确定时,此时1比特的候选取值为{00,01,10,11},分别代表第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量为{0,1,2,3}。
若第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS,则第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量的最大允许取值为{1,2,3,4};若第i个时间单元上未配置前置DMRS,则第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量的最大允许取值为{0,1,2,3}。
应理解,上述比特的取值与DMRS数量的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其对应关系作具体限定。
当第i个取值用于指示该N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量:
S730a网络设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
此时,若网络设备未向终端设备发送第四指示信息,或者第四指示信息的取值为缺省时,则默认第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS。
可选地,第i个取值还可以用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,包括两种可能的情形:
应理解,DMRS的总数量为前置DMRS的数量与附加DMRS的数量的总和。
情形一:当第i个取值用1比特来指示时,1比特的取值为{0,1}分别代表此时第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量为{0,1}。
此时第i个时间单元上DMRS总数量为2时,需要利用额外的指示信息去指示,例如,该指示信息可以通过RRC信令指示,也可以通过DCI来指示,包括利用DCI新增的字段或者复用DCI中的冗余字段,其中,复用DCI的冗余字段可以减少信令开销。本申请对其指示信息的承载位置不作具体限定;
情形二:当第i个取值用2比特来指示时,2比特的取值为{00,01,10,11}分别代表此时第i个时间单元的DMRS总数量为{0,1,2,3}。
此时第i个时间单元中DMRS总数量为4时,需要利用额外的指示信息去指示,该指示信息可以复用RRC信令的冗余字段,也可以复用DCI的冗余字段,其中,复用DCI的冗余字段可以减少信令开销。本申请对其指示信息的承载位置不作具体限定。
应理解,上述比特的取值与DMRS数量的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其对应关系作具体限定。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示该第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的变化量。
附加DMRS数量的变化量是基于高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position的取值而 言的,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元的附加DMRS数量是基于dmrs-Additional Position作相应的代数计算,具体可以包括下面两种情形:
应理解,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量对高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position取值作加减计算。
情形一:当第i个取值用1比特来确定时,此时1比特的可能取值为{0,1},假设分别对应于{附加DMRS数量-2,附加DMRS数量-1};
情形二:当第i个取值用2比特来确定时,此时2比特的可能取值为{00,01,10,11},假设分别对应于{附加DMRS数量-2,附加DMRS数量-1,附加DMRS数量不变,附加DMRS数量+1}。
此时第i个时间单元上配置了前置DMRS,若附加DMRS数量计算结果<0,则表示第i个时间单元上只配置前置DMRS,附加DMRS数量为0;若附加DMRS数量计算结果>0,则此时的计算结果为附加DMRS的数量;
此时第i个时间单元上未配置前置DMRS,若附加DMRS数量计算结果<0,则表示第i个时间单元上既不配置前置DMRS,也不配置附加DMRS;若附加DMRS数量计算结果>0,则此时的计算结果为DMRS的总数量。
当第i个取值用于指示该N个时间单元中第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量:
S730b网络设备向终端设备发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
应理解,第i个取值还可以用于指示第i个时间单元的附加DMRS数量对高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position取值作乘除计算,下面对两种可能的计算结果进行简单的解释:
一种可能的计算结果:当第i个取值的指示结果为附加DMRS的数量为小数,则可以向上取整或者向下取整,向上取整还是向下取整可以为预定义的也可以通过的额外的信令指示,本申请实施例不作具体限定;
另一种可能的计算结果:若当第i个取值的指示结果为第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量大于1(DMRS连续占据两个时域符号)时或者大于3(DMRS占据1个时域符号)时,则第i个时间单元上实际最多可以配置的附加DMRS数量仍为1或3个。
应理解,附加DMRS的数量的变化量是针对RRC信令已经配置的附加DMRS的数量而言的,本申请实施例并不对RRC信令配置好的附加DMRS的数量作具体限定。
应理解,上述比特的取值与附加DMRS数量变化的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其对应关系作具体限定。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量。
DMRS总数量的变化量是基于高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position的取值而言的,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量为基于dmrs-Additional Position作相应的代数计算,具体可以包括下面两种情形:
应理解,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量对高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position取值作加减计算。
情形一:当第i个取值用1比特来确定时,此时1比特的可能取值为{0,1},假设分 别对应于为{DMRS总数量-2,DMRS总数量-1};
情形二:当第i个取值用2比特来确定时,此时2比特的可能取值为{00,01,10,11},假设分别对应于为{DMRS总数量-2,DMRS总数量-1,DMRS总数量不变,DMRS总数量+1}。
此时若DMRS总数量计算结果<0,则表示第i个时间单元中上既不配置前置DMRS,也不配置附加DMRS数量;若DMRS总数量计算结果>0,则此时的计算结果为DMRS的总数量;
若DMRS总数量计算结果大于0,比如为1,则可以理解为在第i个时间单元上配置了1个前置DMRS;若DMRS总数量计算结果为2,则可以理解为在第i个时间单元上配置1个前置DMRS和1个附加DMRS;若DMRS总数量计算结果为3,则可以理解为在第i个时间单元上配置了1个前置DMRS和2个附加DMRS,以此类推。
应理解,第i个取值还可以用于指示第i个时间单元的附加DMRS数量对高层信令配置的dmrs-Additional Position取值作乘除计算,下面对两种可能的计算结果进行简单的解释:
一种可能的计算结果:当第i个取值的指示结果为DMRS的总数量为小数,则可以向上取整或者向下取整,向上取整还是向下取整可以为预定义的也可以通过的额外的信令指示,本申请实施例不作具体限定;
另一种可能的计算结果:若当第i个取值的指示结果为第i个时间单元的DMRS的总数量大于2(DMRS连续占据两个时域符号)时或者大于4(DMRS占据1个时域符号)时,则第i个时间单元中实际最多可以配置的DMRS的总数量仍为2或4个。
应理解,上述比特的取值与DMRS数量变化的对应关系仅用于举例,本申请实施例并不对其对应关系作具体限定。
应理解,DMRS的总数量的变化量是针对RRC信令已经配置的附加DMRS的数量而言的,本申请实施例并不对RRC信令配置的附加DMRS的数量作具体限定。
应理解,当第三指示信息承载于DCI中时:
第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量,即DCI覆盖了原来RRC信令配置的附加DMRS数量的取值;
当所述第三指示信息用于指示N个时间单元的附加DMRS数量的变化量信息或者N个时间单元的DMRS总数量的变化量信息时,终端设备或者网络设备根据第三指示信息,结合原来RRC信令中配置的附加DMRS数量的取值进行代数计算,以配置N个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量或者DMRS总数量。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于等于1且小于等于K的正整数。
应理解,“居中的”时域符号指的是某个时间单元上中间三分之一段中的任意一个可能的时域符号,本申请实施例并不限制“居中的”时域符号为最中间的某个时域符号。
例如,以1个时间单元为一次PUSCH上的数据块传输为例,当前网络设备调度的PUSCH占据的时域符号为14个,即上述第j个时间单元占据的时域符号数量为14,此时前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号可以为第7个时域符号,也可以为第6或第8个时域符号,即保证前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为居中的时域符号即可。本申请实施例不对居中的时域符号的位置作具体限定。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由RRC信令配置。网络设备需要向终端设备发送RRC信令,以确定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号;
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。此时网络设备不需要向终端设备发送定前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号的RRC信令。
应理解,该步骤中的时间单元可以是时隙slot,或者子时隙sub-slot,还可以指1次数据块传输所占用的时域资源,本申请实施例对其不作具体限定。
应理解,每个时间单元上实际可以配置的DMRS的数量受限于每个时间单元上的PUSCH或者PDSCH占用的时域符号数量,因此本申请实施例提出的利用第三指示信息确定每个时间单元上DMRS数量的技术方案,是针对于此时时间单元上DMRS最多可能配置的数量而言的。
应理解,第四指示信息和第五指示信息可以通过RRC信令来指示,也可以通过DCI来指示,包括利用DCI新增的字段或者复用DCI的冗余字段,其中复用DCI的冗余字段可以减少信令开销,本申请实施例并不对其承载位置作具体限定。
当终端设备联合估计PDSCH的信道质量时,终端接收上述指示信息之后,终端设备根据N个时间单元中的每个时间单元的DMRS数量,对网络设备发送的下行数据进行解调;
当网络设备联合估计PUSCH的信道质量时,终端设备接收上述指示信息之后,在N个时间单元中的每个时间单元发送上行数据时如上述指示信息指示的方式配置DMRS的数量,网络设备对终端设备发送的上行数据进行解调。
以上,详细说明了本申请提供的灵活配置N个时间单元中每个时间单元上的DMRS数量的方案,经过上述步骤,网络设备或者终端设备可以通过上述指示信息灵活配置N个时间单元的DMRS数量,在联合信道估计中,一方面能够保证足够的信道估计准确性,另一方面能够保证较低的DMRS总开销,有助于改善传输的效率和性能。
图8是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。该通信装置800包括收发单元810和处理单元820,收发单元810可以与外部进行通信,处理单元820用于进行数据处理。收发单元810还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
可选地,该终端设备通信装置还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元可以用于存储指令或者和/或数据,处理单元820可以读取存储单元中的指令或者和/或数据。
该通信装置800可以用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备所执行的动作,这时,该通信装置800可以为终端设备或者可配置于终端设备的部件,收发单元810用于执行上文所示方法实施例中终端设备侧的收发相关的操作,处理单元820用于执行上文所示方法实施例中终端设备侧的处理相关的操作。
作为一种设计,该通信装置800用于执行上文图2所示实施例中终端设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置800中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图8所示,所述终端设 备800包括:
收发单元810:用于接收网络设备发送的第一调度信息,第一调度信息用于确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;
处理单元820:用于确定第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息是否相同,其中,第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,第二时间单元为第一时间单元之前的时间单元,第一时间单元与第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
若第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,第一时间单元上的传输和第二时间单元上的传输相同;
收发单元810还用于:在第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,在第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
可选地,第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
可选地,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的第三调度信息,第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
发送设备不关闭功率放大器、发送设备不进行载频切换或者发送设备不进行天线切换。
可选地,第二条件在第一持续时间内内有效,第一持续时间由网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,第一持续时间为预定义的。
可选地,收发单元810接收数据前,收发单元810还用于:向网络设备上报能力信息,能力信息用于指示通信装置能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
作为一种设计,该通信装置800用于执行上文图3所示实施例中终端设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置800中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图8所示,所述终端设备800包括:
收发单元810,用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与第三时间单元具有相同的DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,第三时间单元与第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;处理单元820,用于根据第一指示信息确定多个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的配置数量。
可选地,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于确定多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;
其中,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,第二指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数;或者,
K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,第二指示信息用于确定K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,
K个时间单元包含多个数据块,多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,第二指示信息用于确定K个时间单元的数量。
可选地,收发单元810接收多个时间单元上的数据前,收发单元810还用于:向网络设备上报第一能力信息,第一能力信息用于指示终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
可选地,K小于或等于M。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
可选地,第一指示信息、第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令。
可选地,DMRS数量的配置信息包括附加DMRS数量的配置信息、DMRS总数量的配置信息、附加DMRS数量的变化量配置信息或DMRS总数量的变化量的配置信息中的任意一种。
作为一种设计,该通信装置800用于执行上文图5所示实施例中终端设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置800中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图8所示,所述终端设备800包括:
收发单元810,用于接收网络设备发送的第一下行控制信息DCI,第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样;处理单元820,用于根据第一DMRS配置图样确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,K为大于等于2的正整数。
可选地,K为预定义的,或者K由网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者K由第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量决定。
可选地,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,该额外的指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数;或者,
K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,该额外的指示信息用于确定K个时间单元中的不同数据块的数量;或者,
K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块部分相同,且部分不同,该额外的指示信息用于确定K个时间单元中的不同数据块的数目数量。
可选地,DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置或者为预定义的配置图样集合。
可选地,第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,收发单元810还用于:接收网络设备发送的媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,MACCE信令用于激活通信装置根据第一DMRS配置图样的索引值从DMRS配置图样集合确定第一DMRS配置图样。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS 占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,K个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
可选地,第一DMRS配置图样包括附加DMRS数量的配置图样、DMRS总数量的配置图样、附加DMRS数量的变化量配置图样或DMRS总数量的变化量的配置图样中的任意一种。
作为一种设计,该通信装置800用于执行上文图6所示实施例中终端设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置800中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图8所示,所述终端设备800包括:
收发单元810,用于接收网络设备发送的第一信息,第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计;处理单元820,用于根据第一信息确定K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数。
可选地,K大于第一门限值。
可选地,第一门限值为预定义的,或者通过第二信息指示的。
可选地,第一消息和第二消息可以承载在同一条信令中,也可以承载在不同的信令中。
可选地,第一信息承载于DCI或者RRC信令中。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,K个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
作为一种设计,该通信装置800用于执行上文图7所示实施例中终端设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置800中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图8所示,所述终端设备800包括:
收发单元810,用于接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息,第三指示信息包括N个取值,N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,N个参数中的第i个取值用于指示N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量信息,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;处理单元820,用于根据第三指示信息确定N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量信息。
可选地,第三指示信息包括N组比特,N组比特与N个时间单元一一对应,N个参 数中的第i个取值对应于N组比特中的第i组比特。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,
前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,第i个取值通过1比特确定。
可选地,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
可选地,第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
当第三指示信息承载于DCI中,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的配置信息,配置信息用于指示DMRS的数量信息的种类。
可选地,第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,DMRS数量信息的种类为预定义的或者,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的配置信息,配置信息用于指示DMRS的数量信息的种类。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,收发单元810还用于,接收网络设备发送的第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
可选地,第三指示信息承载于DCI中,处理单元820用于根据第三指示信息确定第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
处理单元820用于根据第三指示信息确定第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
处理单元820用于根据第三指示信息和RRC信令确定第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,RRC信令用于指示第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
处理单元820用于根据第三指示信息和RRC信令确定第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,RRC信令用于指示第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
可选地,N个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为N个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于N的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,N个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
应理解,根据本申请实施例的终端设备800可对应于前述方法实施例的终端设备,并 且终端设备800中的各个单元的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤,因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
图8中的处理单元820可以由处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发单元810可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。收发单元810还可称为通信单元或通信接口。存储单元可以通过存储器实现。
应理解,根据本申请实施例的网络设备800可对应于前述方法实施例的终端设备,并且终端设备800中的各个单元的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤,因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
图9是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。该通信装置900包括收发单元910和处理单元920,收发单元910可以与外部进行通信,处理单元920用于进行数据处理。收发单元910还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
可选地,该通信装置900还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元可以用于存储指令或者和/或数据,处理单元920可以读取存储单元中的指令或者和/或数据。
该通信装置900可以用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备所执行的动作,这时,该通信装置900可以为网络设备或者可配置于网络设备的部件,收发单元910用于执行上文所示方法实施例中终端设备侧的收发相关的操作,处理单元920用于执行上文所示方法实施例中终端设备侧的处理相关的操作。
作为一种设计,该通信装置900用于执行上文图2所示实施例中网络设备的动作,可选地,通信装置900中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图9所示,终端设备900包括:
处理单元920,用于定第一调度信息,第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;其中,第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;
其中,第二时间单元为第一时间单元之前的时间单元,第一时间单元与第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;
第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,第一时间单元上的传输和第二时间单元上的传输相同;
收发单元910,用于向终端设备发送第一调度信息;收发单元910还用于,在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上向终端设备发送下行数据;或者,在第一时间单元和第二时间单元上接收终端设备发送的上行数据。
可选地,第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
可选地,收发单元910还用于:向终端设备发送第三调度信息,第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,第二条件包括如下一种或多种:
发送设备不关闭功率放大器、发送设备不进行载频切换或者发送设备不进行天线切换。
可选地,第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,第一持续时间由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,第一持续时间为预定义的。
可选地,收发单元910发送下行数据时,收发单元910还用于:接收终端设备发送的 能力信息,能力信息用于指示终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
作为一种设计,该通信装置900用于执行上文图3所示实施例中网络设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置900中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图9所示,所述终端设备900包括:
处理单元920,用于确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与第三时间单元具有相同的DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,第三时间单元与第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;收发单元910,用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息。
可选地,收发单元910还用于向终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于确定多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;
其中,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,第二指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数;或者,
所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,
所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
可选地,收发单元910在多个时间单元上发送下行数据前,收发单元910还用于:接收终端设备发送的第一能力信息,第一能力信息用于指示终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
可选地,K小于或等于M。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
可选地,第一指示信息、第二指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令。
可选地,DMRS数量的配置信息包括附加DMRS数量的配置信息、DMRS总数量的配置信息、附加DMRS数量的变化量配置信息或DMRS总数量的变化量的配置信息中的任意一种。
作为一种设计,该通信装置900用于执行上文图5所示实施例中网络设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置900中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图9所示,所述终端设备900包括:
处理单元920,用于确定第一下行控制信息DCI,第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配 置图样,第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样,第一DMRS配置图样用于确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数;收发单元910,用于向终端设备发送所述第一DCI。
可选地,K为预定义的,或者K由网络设备通过额外的指示信息指示的,或者K由第一DMRS配置图样中的取值内容的数量决定。
可选地,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,额外的指示信息用于确定数据块的重复传输次数;或者,
K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块不完全相同,额外的指示信息用于确定K个时间单元中的不同数据块的数量。
不完全相同可以理解为多个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,也可以理解为多个时间单元上传输的数据块部分相同,其余部分不同。
可选地,DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置或者为预定义的配置图样集合。
可选地,第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,收发单元910向终端设备发送所述第一DCI之前,收发单元910还用于:向终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,MAC CE信令用于激活终端设备根据第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从DMRS配置图样集合中确定第一DMRS配置图样。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,
前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,K个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
可选地,第一DMRS配置图样包括附加DMRS数量的配置图样、DMRS总数量的配置图样、附加DMRS数量的变化量配置图样或DMRS总数量的变化量的配置图样中的任意一种。
作为一种设计,该通信装置900用于执行上文图6所示实施例中网络设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置900中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图9所示,所述终端设备900包括:
处理单元920,用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数;收发单元910,用于向终端设备发送第一信息。
可选地,K大于第一门限值,第一门限值为预定义的;或者,第一门限值由通信装置通过第二信息指示;可选地,第一消息与第二消息可以承载于同一条信令中,也可以承载于不同的信令中。
可选地,第一信息可以承载于DCI或者RRC信令中。
可选地,K个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为K个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于K的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,
前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,K个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
作为一种设计,该通信装置900用于执行上文图7所示实施例中网络设备的动作,可选地,所述通信装置900中各个模块可以是通过软件来实现的。如图9所示,所述终端设备900包括:
处理单元920,用于确定第三指示信息,第三指示信息包括N个取值,N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量信息,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;收发单元910,用于向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
可选地,第三指示信息包括N组比特,N组比特与N个时间单元一一对应,N个取值中的第i个取值对应于N组比特中的第i组比特。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,
前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,第i个取值通过1比特确定。
可选地,第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
可选地,DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和。
可选地,第三指示信息承载于DCI中,收发单元910还用于,向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于指示DMRS的数量信息的种类。
可选地,第三指示信息承载于RRC信令中,DMRS数量信息的种类为预定义的或者,收发单元910还用于,向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于指示DMRS的数量信息的种类。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,收发单元910还用于,向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
可选地,第i个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,收发单元910还用于,向终端设备发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
可选地,第三指示信息用于指示终端设备确定第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,
第三指示信息用于指示终端设备确定第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中第i 个取值用于指示第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,
第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示终端设备确定第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,其中,第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,RRC信令用于指示第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,
第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示终端设备确定第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,RRC信令用于指示第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
可选地,N个时间单元中的第j个时间单元上只配置一个前置DMRS时,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为第j个时间单元上的居中的时域符号,第j个时间单元为N个时间单元中除首尾两个时间单元以外的任意一个时间单元,其中,j为大于1且小于N的正整数。
可选地,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,前置DMRS占据的起始时域符号为预定义的。
可选地,N个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
图9中的处理单元920可以由处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发单元910可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。收发单元910还可称为通信单元或通信接口。存储单元可以通过存储器实现。
应理解,根据本申请实施例的网络设备900可对应于前述方法实施例的网络设备,并且网络设备900中的各个单元的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤,因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
如图10所示,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1000。该通信装置1000包括处理器1010,处理器1010与存储器1020耦合,存储器1020用于存储计算机程序或指令或者和/或数据,处理器1010用于执行存储器1020存储的计算机程序或指令和/或者数据,使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。
可选地,该通信装置1000包括的处理器1010为一个或多个。
可选地,如图10所示,该通信装置1000还可以包括存储器1020。
可选地,该通信装置1000包括的存储器1020可以为一个或多个。
可选地,该存储器1020可以与该处理器1010集成在一起,或者分离设置。
可选地,如图10所示,该通信装置1000还可以包括收发器1030,收发器1030用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如,处理器1010用于控制收发器1030进行信号的接收和/或发送。
作为一种方案,该通信装置1000用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的操作。
例如,处理器1010用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的处理相关的操作,收发器1030用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的收发相关的操作。
作为另一种方案,该通信装置1000用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的操作。
例如,处理器1010用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的处理相关的操作,收发器1030用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1100,该通信装置1100可以是终端设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1100可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的操作。当该通信装置1100为终端设备时,图11示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图11中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图11所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图11中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器,在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。
如图11所示,终端设备包括收发单元1110和处理单元1120。收发单元1110也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元1120也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。
可选地,可以将收发单元1110中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1110中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1110包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
例如,在一种实现方式中,收发单元1110用于执行图2至图7中的终端设备的接收操作。处理单元1120用于执行图2至图7中终端设备侧的处理动作。
应理解,图11仅为示例而非限定,上述包括收发单元和处理单元的终端设备可以不依赖于图11所示的结构。
当该通信装置1100为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1200,该通信装置1200可以是网络设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1200可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备所执行的操作。
当该通信装置1200为网络设备时,例如为基站。图12示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括1210部分以及1220部分。1212部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频 信号与基带信号的转换;1220部分主要用于基带处理,对基站进行控制等。1210部分通常可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。1220部分通常是基站的控制中心,通常可以称为处理单元,用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理操作。
1210部分的收发单元,也可以称为收发机或收发器等,其包括天线和射频电路,其中射频电路主要用于进行射频处理。可选地,可以将1210部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即1210部分包括接收单元和发送单元。接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
1220部分可以包括一个或多个单板,每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板,各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式,也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器,或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器,或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
例如,在一种实现方式中,1210部分的收发单元用于执行图2至图3所示实施例中由网络设备执行的收发相关的步骤;1220部分用于执行图2至图3所示实施例中由网络设备执行的处理相关的步骤。
应理解,图12仅为示例而非限定,上述包括收发单元和处理单元的网络设备可以不依赖于图12所示的结构。
当该通信装置1200为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有用于实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备执行的方法,或由网络设备执行的方法的计算机指令。
例如,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得该计算机可以实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备执行的方法,或由网络设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,该指令被计算机执行时使得该计算机实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备执行的方法,或由网络设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上文实施例中的网络设备与终端设备。
作为一个示例,该通信系统包括:上文结合图2至图7描述的实施例中的网络设备与终端设备。
上述提供的任一种通信装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例,此处不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备可以包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。其中,硬件层可以包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。操作系统层的操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、 iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。应用层可以包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。
本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构进行特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可。例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本文中使用的术语“制品”可以涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。
本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可以包括但不限于:无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
应理解,本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU,还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解,本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)。例如,RAM可以用作外部高速缓存。作为示例而非限定,RAM可以包括如下多种形式:静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。
需要说明的是,当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时,存储器(存储模块)可以集成在处理器中。
还需要说明的是,本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可 以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
还应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
还应理解,本申请实施例中引入编号“第一”和“第二”只是为了区分不同的对象,比如,区分不同的“设备”,或,“单元”并不对本申请实施例构成限定。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。
Claims (95)
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于所述终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;所述第一时间单元上的发送满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;所述终端设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,所述终端设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
- 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一调度信息和所述第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
- 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
- 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收下行数据前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备上报能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为所述多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;根据所述第一指示信息,所述终端设备确定所述多个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量。
- 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
- 如权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收所述多个时间单元上的数据前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备上报第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,K小于或等于M。
- 如权利要求6-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样;根据所述第一DMRS配置图样,所述终端设备确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
- 如权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的所述第一DCI之前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计;根据所述第一信息,所述终端设备确定所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,K大于第一门限值;所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
- 如权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;根据所述第三指示信息,所述终端设备确定所述N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量。
- 如权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
- 如权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求17-19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述DMRS的数量包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,所述DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和,所述DMRS的数量的种类为预定义的,或者,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示。
- 如权利要求17-20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求17-20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求17-22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,所述终端设备根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:网络设备确定第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的数据传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;所述第一时间单元上的数据传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一调度消息;所述网络设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送下行数据;或者,所述网络设备在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收上行数据。
- 如权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求24或25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
- 如权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
- 如权利要求24或25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备发送下行数据前,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:网络设备确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为所述 多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
- 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
- 如权利要求29或30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备在所述多个时间单元上发送下行数据前,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,K小于或等于M。
- 如权利要求29-32中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:网络设备确定第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样用于确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数;所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第一DCI。
- 如权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
- 如权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第一DCI之前,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:网络设备确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数;所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第一信息。
- 如权利要求37所述的方法,其特征在于,K大于第一门限值;所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
- 如权利要求37或38所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
- 一种DMRS的配置方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:网络设备确定第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述第三指示信息。
- 如权利要求40所述的方法,其特征在于,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
- 如权利要求40或41所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求40-42中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,所述DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类为预定义的,或者,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示。
- 如权利要求40-43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求40-43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求40-45中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息和RRC信令指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,所述网络设备通过发送所述第三指示信息和RRC信令指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量;其中,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;处理单元,用于确定所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息是否相同,其中,所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;若所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;所述收发单元还用于,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送上行数据;或者,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收下行数据。
- 如权利要求47所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求47或48所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:接收网络设备发送的第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
- 如权利要求49所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由所述网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
- 如权利要求47或48所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元接收下行数据前,所述收发单元还用于:向所述网络设备上报能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述通信装置能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述多个时间单元上的DMRS配置数量。
- 如权利要求52所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
- 如权利要求52或53所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元接收所述多个时间单元上的数据前,所述收发单元还用于:向所述网络设备上报第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述通信装置最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求54所述的通信装置,其特征在于,K小于或等于M。
- 如权利要求52-55中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样;处理单元,用于根据所述第一DCI确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求57所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
- 如权利要求57或58所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一DCI用于指示所述第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述收发单元接收所述网络设备发送的所述第一DCI之前,所述收发单元用于:接收所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述通信装置根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图 样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计;处理单元,用于根据所述第一信息确定所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求60所述的通信装置,其特征在于,K大于第一门限值;所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述网络设备通过第二信息指示的;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
- 如权利要求60或61所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;处理单元,用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述N个时间单元中的每个时间单元上的DMRS的数量信息。
- 如权利要求63所述的通信装置,其特征在于,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
- 如权利要求63或64所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求63-65中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,所述DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类为预定义的,或者,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述网络设备通过配置信息指示。
- 如权利要求63-66中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求63-66中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述网络设备发送的第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求63-68中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中,所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,所述处理单元用于根据所述第三指示信息和RRC信令确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元,用于确定第一调度信息,所述第一调度信息用于终端设备确定第一时间单元上的传输是否满足第一条件;其中,所述第一调度信息与第二单元时间单元的第二调度信息相同,所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件;或者,所述第一调度信息与第二时间单元的第二调度信息不同,所述第一时间单元上的传输不满足第一条件;其中,所述第二时间单元为所述第一时间单元之前的时间单元,所述第一时间单元与所述第二时间单元上的传输方向相同,且所述第二时间单元和所述第一时间单元之间不存在相反方向的传输,所述第一条件包括相同的发送功率、相同的预编码、相同的天线端口和相同的频域资源中的至少一项;所述第一时间单元上的传输满足第一条件,所述第一时间单元上的传输和所述第二时间单元上的传输相同;收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一调度信息;所述收发单元还用于,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上发送下行数据;或者,在所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元上接收上行数据。
- 如权利要求70所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一调度信息和第二调度信息承载于下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求70或71所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第三调度信息,所述第三调度信息用于指示发送设备在第一持续时间内满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括如下一种或多种:所述发送设备不关闭功率放大器、所述发送设备不进行载频切换或者所述发送设备不进行天线切换。
- 如权利要求72所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二条件在所述第一持续时间内有效,所述第一持续时间由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述第一持续时间为预定义的。
- 如权利要求70或71所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元发送下行数据 前,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述终端设备发送的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备能否支持对多个时间单元的联合信道估计。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元,用于确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第三时间单元与第四时间单元间隔的时间单元数量,所述第三时间单元属于多个时间单元,所述第四时间单元为多个时间单元中与所述第三时间单元具有相同的解调参考信号DMRS配置数量且间隔最近的一个时间单元,其中,所述第三时间单元与所述第四时间单元之间包括至少一个第五时间单元,所述第五时间单元上的DMRS配置数量小于所述第三时间单元上的DMRS配置数量;收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
- 如权利要求75所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述多个时间单元的时间单元数量为K,K为大于或等于2的正整数;其中,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述数据块的重复传输次数;或者,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上传输的数据块各不相同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元上的不同数据块的数量;或者,所述K个时间单元包含多个数据块,所述多个数据块部分相同,且部分不同,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述K个时间单元的数量。
- 如权利要求75或76所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元在所述多个时间单元上发送下行数据前,所述收发单元还用于:接收所述终端设备发送的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息用于指示所述终端设备最多可支持M个时间单元的联合信道估计,其中,M为大于或等于2的正整数。
- 如权利要求77所述的通信装置,其特征在于,K小于或等于M。
- 如权利要求75-78中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个时间单元中的时间单元为以下任意一种:时隙、子时隙、帧、子帧,或者一次数据块传输占用的时域资源。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元,用于确定第一下行控制信息DCI,所述第一DCI用于指示第一DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样属于DMRS配置图样集合,所述DMRS配置图样集合包括至少两种不同的DMRS配置图样,所述第一DMRS配置图样用于确定K个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量,其中,所述K个时间单元中至少两个时间单元上的DMRS的配置数量不同,其中,K为大于等于2的正整数;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第一DCI。
- 如权利要求80所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述DMRS配置图样集合由无线资源控制RRC信令配置;或者,所述DMRS配置图样集合为预定义的配置图样集合。
- 如权利要求80或81所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一DCI用于指示所述 第一DMRS配置图案的索引值,所述收发单元用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一DCI之前,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,所述MAC CE信令用于激活所述终端设备根据所述第一DMRS配置图样的索引值,从所述DMRS配置图样集合中确定所述第一DMRS配置图样。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元,用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示在K个时间单元上采用相同的发送功率或者在K个时间单元上进行联合信道估计,所述K个时间单元中的每个时间单元上最多配置1个附加解调参考信号DMRS,其中,K为大于或等于2的正整数;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第一信息。
- 如权利要求83所述的通信装置,其特征在于,K大于第一门限值;所述第一门限值为预定义的;或者,所述第一门限值由所述通信装置通过第二信息指示;其中,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于同一条信令中;或者,所述第二信息和所述第一信息承载于不同的信令中。
- 如权利要求83或84所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息承载于下行控制信息DCI或者无线资源控制RRC信令中。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元,用于确定第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息包括N个取值,所述N个取值与N个时间单元一一对应,所述N个取值中的第i个取值用于指示所述N个时间单元中的第i个时间单元上的解调参考信号DMRS的数量,其中,i和N为正整数,且1≤i≤N;收发单元,用于向终端设备发送所述第三指示信息。
- 如权利要求86所述的通信装置,其特征在于,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为1,所述第i个取值通过2比特确定;或者,前置DMRS占据的时域符号数量为2,所述第i个取值通过1比特确定。
- 如权利要求86或87所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息可以承载于无线资源控制RRC信令,或者下行控制信息DCI中。
- 如权利要求86-88中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述DMRS的数量信息包括以下信息种类中的任意一种:附加DMRS的数量、DMRS的总数量、附加DMRS数量的变化量、DMRS总数量的变化量,其中,所述DMRS的总数量为附加DMRS的数量与前置DMRS的数量的总和,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类为预定义的,或者,所述DMRS的数量信息的种类由所述收发单元发送的配置信息指示。
- 如权利要求86-89中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上不配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求86-89中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第i个取值用于 指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述收发单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第i个时间单元上是否配置前置DMRS。
- 如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息承载于DCI中,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量;或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量;或者,所述第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS的数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的附加DMRS数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量;或者,所述第三指示信息和RRC信令用于指示所述终端设备确定所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS的总数量,其中所述第i个取值用于指示所述第i个时间单元上的DMRS总数量的变化量,所述RRC信令用于指示所述第i个时间上的附加DMRS数量。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法被执行;或权利要求24至46中任一项所述的方法被执行。
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令用于实现权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法;或权利要求24至46中任一项所述的方法。
- 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法;或权利要求24至46中任一项所述的方法。
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2021/072329 WO2022151444A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-01-15 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
EP21918797.8A EP4262124A4 (en) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-04-05 | DMRS CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS |
CN202180085579.4A CN116648886A (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-04-05 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
PCT/CN2021/085515 WO2022151598A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-04-05 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
US18/352,257 US20230361960A1 (en) | 2021-01-15 | 2023-07-14 | Dmrs configuration method and device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2021/072329 WO2022151444A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-01-15 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022151444A1 true WO2022151444A1 (zh) | 2022-07-21 |
Family
ID=82447892
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2021/072329 WO2022151444A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-01-15 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
PCT/CN2021/085515 WO2022151598A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-04-05 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2021/085515 WO2022151598A1 (zh) | 2021-01-15 | 2021-04-05 | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20230361960A1 (zh) |
EP (1) | EP4262124A4 (zh) |
CN (1) | CN116648886A (zh) |
WO (2) | WO2022151444A1 (zh) |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20220312409A1 (en) * | 2021-03-29 | 2022-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmission continuity capability reporting |
WO2024065750A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-30 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 能力信息的上报方法、装置、设备及存储介质 |
WO2024065792A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-30 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 时长确定方法及装置、存储介质 |
Families Citing this family (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20230354279A1 (en) * | 2022-04-28 | 2023-11-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods to include demodulation reference signal bundling in multi-subscriber identity module devices |
WO2024026891A1 (zh) * | 2022-08-05 | 2024-02-08 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 基于人工智能ai的信道估计方法和装置 |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN104780620A (zh) * | 2014-01-10 | 2015-07-15 | 夏普株式会社 | 用户设备间通信的控制信令发送和接收方法以及设备 |
CN110535572A (zh) * | 2019-05-15 | 2019-12-03 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 上行信息反馈资源确定方法和装置 |
US20200092032A1 (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2020-03-19 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Resource unit setting method, resource unit transmission method, and apparatus |
CN110971369A (zh) * | 2018-09-28 | 2020-04-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | 数据传输方法及装置 |
Family Cites Families (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN109983730B (zh) * | 2016-11-22 | 2022-06-14 | 三星电子株式会社 | 无线通信系统中的信道估计和数据解码的方法和装置 |
ES2925892T3 (es) * | 2016-11-22 | 2022-10-20 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | Procedimiento y aparato para la estimación del canal y la decodificación de datos en un sistema de comunicación inalámbrica |
US11533155B2 (en) * | 2019-06-07 | 2022-12-20 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Triggering demodulation reference signal bundling |
US11310022B2 (en) * | 2019-06-20 | 2022-04-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Demodulation reference signal bundling |
US11310088B2 (en) * | 2019-07-11 | 2022-04-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Physical shared channel reference signal bundling |
-
2021
- 2021-01-15 WO PCT/CN2021/072329 patent/WO2022151444A1/zh active Application Filing
- 2021-04-05 EP EP21918797.8A patent/EP4262124A4/en active Pending
- 2021-04-05 CN CN202180085579.4A patent/CN116648886A/zh active Pending
- 2021-04-05 WO PCT/CN2021/085515 patent/WO2022151598A1/zh active Application Filing
-
2023
- 2023-07-14 US US18/352,257 patent/US20230361960A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN104780620A (zh) * | 2014-01-10 | 2015-07-15 | 夏普株式会社 | 用户设备间通信的控制信令发送和接收方法以及设备 |
US20200092032A1 (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2020-03-19 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Resource unit setting method, resource unit transmission method, and apparatus |
CN110971369A (zh) * | 2018-09-28 | 2020-04-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | 数据传输方法及装置 |
CN110535572A (zh) * | 2019-05-15 | 2019-12-03 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 上行信息反馈资源确定方法和装置 |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20220312409A1 (en) * | 2021-03-29 | 2022-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmission continuity capability reporting |
US12082167B2 (en) * | 2021-03-29 | 2024-09-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmission continuity capability reporting |
WO2024065750A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-30 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 能力信息的上报方法、装置、设备及存储介质 |
WO2024065792A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-30 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 时长确定方法及装置、存储介质 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP4262124A4 (en) | 2024-06-26 |
CN116648886A (zh) | 2023-08-25 |
EP4262124A1 (en) | 2023-10-18 |
US20230361960A1 (en) | 2023-11-09 |
WO2022151598A1 (zh) | 2022-07-21 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2022151444A1 (zh) | 一种dmrs的配置方法及设备 | |
CN110167153B (zh) | 一种下行控制信息dci的传输方法、装置及网络设备 | |
EP3456126B1 (en) | Configuration of uplink transmission for a wireless device | |
CN110622454B (zh) | 无线通信的方法和装置 | |
US11903010B2 (en) | Sidelink quality measurement method and communications apparatus | |
CN110891312B (zh) | 一种信息发送方法,信息接收的方法和装置 | |
CN106413105B (zh) | 一种资源传输的指示方法、装置、网络侧设备及终端 | |
EP3731583B1 (en) | Sounding reference signal transmission method and terminal device | |
CN112399569A (zh) | 一种通信方法及通信装置 | |
US20150327187A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for reporting power headroom | |
KR20200044963A (ko) | 업링크 제어 채널을 전송하기 위한 방법 및 장치 | |
CA3039722A1 (en) | Uplink control information transmission method, terminal device, and network device | |
KR102249125B1 (ko) | 통신 방법 및 통신 디바이스 | |
CN109996339B (zh) | 一种通信方法及装置 | |
CN114828237A (zh) | 一种调度请求的传输方法及装置 | |
CN113079570A (zh) | 传输方法及设备 | |
CN114451017A (zh) | 一种激活和释放非动态调度传输的方法及装置 | |
WO2020200193A1 (zh) | 一种数据传输方法、装置和设备 | |
US11184885B2 (en) | Information transmission method, terminal device, and network device | |
TWI698134B (zh) | 用於無線通信系統的網路節點和方法 | |
CN109936429B (zh) | 参考信号传输方法和通信装置 | |
WO2022165824A1 (zh) | 传输方法和装置 | |
CN114731257B (zh) | 上行信道解调方法和上行信道解调装置 | |
WO2021114173A1 (zh) | 无线通信方法和装置 | |
CN115733597A (zh) | 保护符号配置方法以及通信装置 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21918648 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21918648 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |